WO2024042834A1 - Mixed composition, retardation film, circularly polarizing plate, production method for mixed composition - Google Patents

Mixed composition, retardation film, circularly polarizing plate, production method for mixed composition Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024042834A1
WO2024042834A1 PCT/JP2023/023117 JP2023023117W WO2024042834A1 WO 2024042834 A1 WO2024042834 A1 WO 2024042834A1 JP 2023023117 W JP2023023117 W JP 2023023117W WO 2024042834 A1 WO2024042834 A1 WO 2024042834A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
formula
carbon atoms
compound
alkyl group
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/023117
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
佳祐 橋詰
修治 原田
憲之 飛田
Original Assignee
住友化学株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 住友化学株式会社 filed Critical 住友化学株式会社
Publication of WO2024042834A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024042834A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D277/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
    • C07D277/60Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D277/62Benzothiazoles
    • C07D277/64Benzothiazoles with only hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached in position 2
    • C07D277/66Benzothiazoles with only hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached in position 2 with aromatic rings or ring systems directly attached in position 2
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F220/00Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
    • C08F220/02Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
    • C08F220/10Esters
    • C08F220/26Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen
    • C08F220/30Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen containing aromatic rings in the alcohol moiety
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/30Polarising elements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/02Details
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/10Apparatus or processes specially adapted to the manufacture of electroluminescent light sources
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K50/00Organic light-emitting devices
    • H10K50/10OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/10OLED displays

Definitions

  • the present invention provides a mixed composition, a retardation film including a cured product of the mixed composition, a circularly polarizing plate including the retardation film, a method for producing the mixed composition, and a method for producing the mixed composition.
  • the present invention relates to a method for producing a reaction mixture composition.
  • Retardation films used in various image display devices are required to be capable of polarization conversion in the entire wavelength range as one of their characteristics, for example, [Re(450)/Re(550)] ⁇ 1 It is known that uniform polarization conversion is theoretically possible in a wavelength range exhibiting reverse wavelength dispersion.
  • Many polymerizable liquid crystal compounds that exhibit reverse wavelength dispersion when polymerized and cured are known to have a so-called T-shaped or H-shaped molecular structure.
  • the structure of the groups (side chains) extending in the long axis direction around the central structure (core structure) of the mold is bilaterally symmetrical, there is a tendency for stronger reverse wavelength dispersion to be exhibited.
  • Patent Documents 1 and 2 have been made to solve the above problems (for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2)
  • a coating solution obtained by dissolving a polymerizable liquid crystal compound in a solvent is applied to a supporting substrate to form a coating film, and then the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the coating film is transferred to a liquid crystal phase state, and the solvent is retained. By removing the film, an optical film such as a retardation film can be obtained.
  • conventional liquid crystal mixtures such as those disclosed in the above patent documents have a high phase transition temperature, and heating at high temperatures required during film formation not only deteriorates film formability but also improves the quality of the resulting optical film. This may cause deterioration of optical properties.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a mixed composition of polymerizable liquid crystal compounds suitable for producing a retardation film having a low phase transition temperature and preferably excellent optical properties.
  • a mixed composition comprising a compound represented by the following formula (2) and at least one of the compound represented by the formula (1) and the compound represented by the formula (3),
  • the area percentage value measured by liquid chromatography of the compound represented by (2) is the compound represented by formula (1), the compound represented by formula (2), and the formula (3) contained in the mixed composition.
  • the mixed composition is more than 50% and less than 95% based on the sum of the area values of the compounds represented by.
  • A-Ar-A (1) A-Ar-B (2) B-Ar-B (3)
  • a 1 and A 2 are each independently a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • Y 1 represents an alkyl group
  • Y 2 represents a CN group or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent
  • the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom
  • the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • -CH 2 - may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -O-CO- or -CO-O-;
  • Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a monovalent carbon atom 6 to 20 aromatic hydrocarbon groups, halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and Z 1 and Z 2 are bonded to each other to form an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocycle.
  • R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
  • Z 4 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, represents a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
  • Ax represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ay may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Y 3 and Y 4 each independently represent the following formula (Y 3 -1): [In formula (Y 3 -1), R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents X 3 , and the substituent X 3 is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, Bromine atom, iodine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, amino group, hydroxyl group, mercapto group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethyl A silyl group, a thioisocyano group, or one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s each independently represent -O-, -S-,
  • F 31 represents an alkyl group
  • F 31 represents an alkanediyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkanediyl group may be substituted with -OR 10 or a halogen atom, and R 10 is a carbon
  • R 10 is a carbon
  • the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom
  • -CH 2 - contained in the alkanediyl group is -O- or -CO- may be substituted with
  • P 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group
  • U 1 represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom, and the aromatic hydrocarbon group is , may be substituted by one or more of the above substituents X3 ;
  • T 1 is -O-,
  • It represents an alicyclic hydrocarbon group or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms
  • the hydrogen atoms contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group are halogen atoms, -R 11 , -OR 12 , which may be substituted with a cyano group or a nitro group
  • R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 12 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • a 1 in formula (4) and A 2 in formula (5) each independently represent a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or a 1,4-phenylenediyl group; 2].
  • a 1 in formula (4) and A 2 in formula (5) each independently represent a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or a 1,4-phenylenediyl group; 2].
  • m is 1 and A 1 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group.
  • n is 1 and A 2 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group.
  • a retardation film comprising a cured product of the mixed composition according to any one of [1] to [9] above.
  • a circularly polarizing plate comprising the retardation film according to [10] above.
  • a 1 is a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. represents a hydrogen group, and when m is an integer of 2 or more, the plurality of A1s may be the same or different, SP 1 is a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Ar in formula (1), formula (6) and formula (7) is a group represented by any of the following formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6): [In formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6), * represents a bond with D 1 or D 2 ; Q 1 represents -S-, -O- or -NR 6 -, R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, Q2 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent; W 1 and W 2 each independently represent -O-, -S-, -
  • Y 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, or an aromatic heterocyclic group
  • Y 2 represents a CN group or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent
  • the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom
  • the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • -CH 2 - may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -O-CO- or -CO-O-;
  • Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a monovalent carbon atom 6 to 20 aromatic hydrocarbon groups, halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and Z 1 and Z 2 are bonded to each other to form an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocycle.
  • R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
  • Z 4 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, represents a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
  • Ax represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ay may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Y 3 and Y 4 each independently represent the following formula (Y 3 -1): [In formula (Y 3 -1), R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents X 3 , and the substituent X 3 is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, Bromine atom, iodine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, amino group, hydroxyl group, mercapto group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethyl A silyl group, a thioisocyano group, or one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s each independently represent -O-, -S-,
  • F 31 represents an alkyl group
  • F 31 represents an alkanediyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkanediyl group may be substituted with -OR 10 or a halogen atom, and R 10 is a carbon
  • R 10 is a carbon
  • the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom
  • -CH 2 - contained in the alkanediyl group is -O- or -CO- may be substituted with
  • P 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group
  • U 1 represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom, and the aromatic hydrocarbon group is , may be substituted by one or more of the above substituents X3 ;
  • T 1 is -O-,
  • It represents an alicyclic hydrocarbon group or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms
  • the hydrogen atoms contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group are halogen atoms, -R 11 , -OR 12 , which may be substituted with a cyano group or a nitro group
  • R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 12 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • a 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 each have the same meaning as A 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 in formula (5)
  • mixing the compound represented by the formula (7) and the compound represented by the formula (8) to produce the compound represented by the formula (2) The method for producing the mixed composition according to [1] above.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention comprises a compound represented by formula (2) (hereinafter also referred to as “compound (2)”) and a compound represented by formula (1) (hereinafter also referred to as “compound (1)”). ) and at least one of the compound represented by formula (3) (hereinafter also referred to as “compound (3)”).
  • a compound (2) having a bilaterally asymmetrical structure centered around the group represented by Ar in formula (2) is replaced with a compound (2) having a bilaterally symmetrical structure centered around Ar in formula (1) or formula (3)
  • the mixed composition of the present invention containing 1) and/or compound (3) in a specific quantitative relationship has a low phase transition temperature to a liquid crystal phase.
  • Compound (2) contained in the mixed composition of the present invention has the formula (2): A-Ar-B (2) It has the structure represented by .
  • Compound (2) has a group represented by Ar in formula (2), and two side chains bonded to the Ar (i.e., A and B in formula (2)) having different structures. It has an asymmetrical structure.
  • a in formula (2) represents formula (4): *-D 1 -(A 1 -E 1 )m-SP 1 -L 1 (4) It has a structure represented by the following, and B in formula (2) is represented by formula (5): *-D 2 -(A 2 -E 2 )n-SP 2 -L 2 (5)
  • Compound (2) has a structure represented by the following, and the compound (2) has an asymmetric structure in terms of the number of ring structures contained in at least each side chain of A and B.
  • m and n each independently represent an integer of 1 or more. m and n are each independently preferably an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2. In equations (4) and (5), m and n are different numbers.
  • the number of ring structures contained in A in formula (2) that is, the group represented by A 1 in formula (4)
  • the ring contained in B in formula (2) The difference from the number of structures (that is, the group represented by A 2 in formula (5)) is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 1. .
  • one of m and n is 1 and the other is 2 or 3. In a more preferred embodiment, one of m and n is 1 and the other is 2.
  • Compound (2) having a left-right asymmetric structure in the number of ring structures contained in each side chain of A and B is a mixed composition with compound (1) and/or compound (3) having a highly symmetrical structure.
  • compounds with a bilaterally symmetrical structure tend to have excellent crystallinity because they can be arranged regularly, and the phase transition temperature tends to be relatively high.
  • the compound with an asymmetric structure may affect the ease of arranging the compound, act to reduce crystallinity, and lower the phase transition temperature. it is conceivable that.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention which has a high proportion of compound (2) having a left-right asymmetric structure in terms of the number of ring structures contained in each side chain of A and B, has a significantly lower phase transition temperature.
  • the effect is a structure in which the number of ring structures in each side chain is the same but left-right asymmetrical (for example, in the case where left-right asymmetrical occurs due to a difference in the length of the alkyl chain, etc.) It tends to appear more markedly than when compounding with a compound having .
  • E 1 and E 2 are each independently preferably a single bond, -O-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NR 5 -, and more Preferably it is a single bond, -O-, -CO-O- or -O-CO-.
  • m is an integer of 2 or more
  • the plural E 1 's may be the same or different
  • n is an integer of 2 or more
  • the plural E 2 's may be the same or different. May be different.
  • a 1 and A 2 each independently represent a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms, which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents an optional alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms represented by A 1 and A 2 include aromatic hydrocarbon groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically, the following (a- Examples include aromatic hydrocarbon groups represented by 1) to (a-8).
  • Examples of the divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms represented by A 1 and A 2 include alicyclic hydrocarbon groups having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, and specifically, the following ( Examples include alicyclic hydrocarbon groups represented by a-9) to (a-11).
  • substituents that the aromatic hydrocarbon group and alicyclic hydrocarbon group may have include alkyl groups having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, and tert-butyl group. ; Alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as methoxy group and ethoxy group; Fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as trifluoromethyl group; Cyano group; Nitro group; Halogen such as fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, etc. Examples include atoms.
  • a 1 and A 2 are an unsubstituted divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an unsubstituted alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms; is preferable, and a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or a 1,4-phenylene group is more preferable.
  • m is an integer of 2 or more
  • the plural A 1 's may be the same or different
  • n is an integer of 2 or more
  • the plural A 2 's may be the same or different. May be different.
  • a 1 and A 2 are each independently a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or a 1,4-phenylene group. Further, when m is 1, it is preferable that A 1 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group, and when n is 1, it is preferable that A 2 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group. Furthermore, in one embodiment of the present invention, A 1 and A 2 bonded to D 1 and D 2 are preferably 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or 1,4-phenylene group, and 1,4-cyclohexane More preferably it is a diyl group.
  • SP 1 and SP 2 each independently represent a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. or a branched alkenylene group, a linear or branched alkynylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or one or more of -CH 2 - constituting the alkylene group, the alkenylene group, and the alkynylene group is -O- , -S-, -NH-, -N(Q)- (Q is a substituent), or -CO- represents a divalent linking group substituted.
  • Examples of the linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms represented by SP 1 and SP 2 include methylene group, ethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, pentylene group, hexylene group, and methylhexylene group. group, heptylene group, etc.
  • Examples of the linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms include ethenylene group, propenylene group, and butenylene group.
  • Examples of the linear or branched alkynylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms include, for example, an ethynylene group.
  • SP 1 and SP 2 are such that one or more of -CH 2 - constituting the alkylene group, alkenylene group, and alkynylene group is -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N(Q)-, or - It may also be a divalent linking group substituted with CO-.
  • substituent represented by Q include the same substituents as those exemplified as substituents that the aromatic hydrocarbon group or alicyclic hydrocarbon group represented by A 1 and A 2 may have. .
  • SP 1 and SP 2 are each independently a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a carbon number It is preferably a linear or branched alkynylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms. or a linear or branched alkynylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably a single bond or a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. More preferred.
  • L 1 and L 2 each independently represent a monovalent organic group, and at least one of L 1 and L 2 is a polymerizable group.
  • the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group.
  • the monovalent organic group represented by L 1 or L 2 is preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 13 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear.
  • the polymerizable groups represented by L 1 and L 2 may be any group that can polymerize compound (2), and specifically include vinyl group, p-stilbene group, acryloyl group, methacryloyl group, Acryloyloxy group, methacroyloxy group, carboxyl group, methylcarbonyl group, hydroxyl group, amide group, alkylamino group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, amino group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, aldehyde group, isocyanate group, thioisocyanate group, etc. is exemplified.
  • Such a polymerizable group may contain an ether bond or an ester bond that connects the above-exemplified group and SP 1 or SP 2 .
  • the polymerizable groups represented by L 1 and L 2 are preferably radically polymerizable groups or cationic polymerizable groups suitable for photopolymerization, especially in that they are easy to handle and easy to manufacture. , an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, an acryloyloxy group, or a methacryloyloxy group are preferred, an acryloyl group or an acryloyloxy group is more preferred in terms of high polymerizability, and an acryloyloxy group is even more preferred.
  • both L 1 and L 2 are polymerizable groups, and L 1 and L 2 are acryloyl group, methacryloyl group, acryloyl group, respectively. It is more preferably an oxy group or a methacryloyloxy group, and even more preferably both L 1 and L 2 are an acryloyloxy group.
  • compound (2) has an asymmetric structure at least in the number of ring structures around the group Ar, for example, as the structure represented by formula (4) (i.e., A in formula (2)), one ring It has a structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-1) to (R-31) having a structure, and as a structure represented by formula (5) (i.e., B in formula (2)), A structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-32) to (R-73) having two ring structures, or a structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-74) to (R-138) having three ring structures. It can have a structure represented by any of the following.
  • the structure represented by formula (4) has a structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-32) to (R-73) having two ring structures, and the structure represented by formula (5)
  • the structure represented by may have a structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-74) to (R-138) having three ring structures.
  • terminal portion in each of the above structures may have any of the following structures.
  • each structure represented by D 1 , SP 1 and L 1 in formula (4) constituting compound (2) is each represented by formula (5 ) is the same as each structure represented by D 2 , SP 2 and L 2 . That is, structure A represented by formula (4) and structure B represented by formula (5) are the structure represented by -(A 1 -E 1 )m- in formula (4), It is preferable that the structure differs only from the structure represented by -(A 2 -E 2 )n- in formula (5).
  • compound (2) has such a structure, the molecular structures of compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3) contained in the liquid crystal mixture are similar or similar to each other, and the liquid crystal mixture is The phase transition temperature tends to be effectively lowered.
  • the liquid crystal compounds have less influence on each other when aligning, and are easily aligned with a high degree of alignment order, so the optical properties of the resulting cured liquid crystal film are improved. Easy to improve.
  • formula (4) and formula (5) it is a group represented by any of the following formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6).
  • the groups represented by formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-5) give a bulky molecular structure in the direction crossing the long axis direction in the polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by formula (2), They have a common feature in that the absorption wavelength in the short axis direction is a long wavelength, and the retardation generated by oriented liquid crystal molecules usually has reverse wavelength dispersion. In the group represented by formula (Ar-6), the retardation generated by aligned liquid crystal molecules often has positive wavelength dispersion.
  • the total number N ⁇ of ⁇ electrons contained in the divalent linking group containing an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocycle represented by formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6) is preferably 12 or more. , more preferably 16 or more, still more preferably 18 or more, particularly preferably 20 or more. Further, it is preferably less than 36, more preferably 32 or less, even more preferably 30 or less, particularly preferably 26 or less.
  • Q 1 represents -S-, -O- or -NR 6 -
  • R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • Q 2 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • W 1 and W 2 each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 6 -, and R 6 has a hydrogen atom or a substituent. represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Y 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • Y 2 represents a CN group or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom, and -CH 2 - contained in the alkyl group is -O-, -CO-, -O-CO- or - May be substituted with CO-O-.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms; 20 alicyclic hydrocarbon group, monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , Z 1 and Z 2 may be combined with each other to form an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocycle.
  • R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Z 4 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a monovalent aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. represents a group hydrocarbon group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 .
  • R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
  • Ax represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle.
  • Ay is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a carbon number having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle. It represents 2 to 30 organic groups, and Ax and Ay may be combined to form a ring.
  • Y 1 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and has 6 to 6 carbon atoms and may have a substituent.
  • a 12 aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferred.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent is preferably an optionally substituted polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group or polycyclic aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group means an aromatic hydrocarbon group having at least two aromatic rings, and a fused aromatic hydrocarbon group formed by condensing two or more aromatic rings. Examples include aromatic hydrocarbon groups formed by bonding a hydrocarbon group and two or more aromatic rings.
  • Polycyclic aromatic heterocyclic group means an aromatic heterocyclic group having at least one heteroaromatic ring and at least one ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring and a heteroaromatic ring.
  • an aromatic heterocyclic group formed by the condensation of one or more aromatic heterocycles and one or more rings selected from the group consisting of aromatic rings and heteroaromatic rings, and at least one heteroaromatic ring and aromatic Examples include an aromatic heterocyclic group formed by bonding a ring and at least one ring selected from the group consisting of a heteroaromatic ring.
  • substituents that the aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group may have include a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, a nitro group, a nitroso group, and an alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of Y 1 include groups represented by the following formulas (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7).
  • Z 5 each independently represents a halogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom , methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, sec-butyl group, cyano group, nitro group, sulfone group, nitroxydo group, carboxyl group, trifluoromethyl group, methoxy group, thiomethyl group, N,N-dimethylamino group, N - Methylamino group is preferred, halogen atom, methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, sec-butyl group, cyano group, nitro group, trifluoromethyl group is more preferred, methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, sec-butyl group A pentyl group and a hexyl group are particularly preferred.
  • V 1 and V 2 are each independently -CO-, -S-, -NR 13 -, -O-, -Se- or - It represents SO 2 -, and is preferably -S-, -NR 13 - or -O-.
  • R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • V 1 , V 2 and W 3 to W 7 preferably represents a group containing S, N or O.
  • a each independently represents an integer of 0 to 3, preferably 0 or 1.
  • b each independently represents an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0.
  • Any group represented by formula (Y 1 -1) to formula (Y 1 -7) is any group represented by formula (Y 1 -8) to formula (Y 1 -13) below.
  • a group represented by formula (Y 1 -8) is preferable, and a group represented by formula (Y 1 -8) is more preferable. Note that the * part represents a connecting part.
  • Z 5 , a, b, V 1 , V 2 and W 3 are the same as those in (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7) It has the same meaning as Z 5 , a, b, V 1 , V 2 and W 3 .
  • Y 1 examples include groups represented by formulas (ar-1) to (ar-840) described in JP-A-2019-003177. Among these, groups represented by the following formulas are preferred.
  • the group represented by formula (Ar-1) specifically includes groups represented by the following formulas (Ar 1 -1) to (Ar 1 -126).
  • the * part in the formula represents a connecting part with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5).
  • the group represented by formula (Ar-2) specifically includes groups represented by the following formulas (Ar 2 -1) to (Ar 2 -13).
  • the * part in the formula represents a connecting part with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5).
  • the group represented by formula (Ar-3) specifically includes groups represented by the following formulas (Ar 3 -1) to (Ar 3 -23).
  • the * part in the formula represents a connecting part with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5).
  • the groups represented by formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-4) include, for example, JP-A No. 2011-207765, JP-A No. 2008-107767, WO2014/ The groups described in JP 010325 and the like may also be used.
  • Y 3 and Y 4 each independently represent the following formula (Y 3 -1): selected from the groups represented by
  • R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents X3 .
  • F 31 represents an alkanediyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkanediyl group may be substituted with -OR 10 or a halogen atom, and R 10 represents a carbon number Represents an alkyl group of 1 to 4, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and -CH 2 - contained in the alkanediyl group is -O- or -CO-. It may be substituted; P 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group.
  • the substituent X 3 is preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, -CF 3 , -OCF 3 or a cyano group.
  • R Y1 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms that is unsubstituted or substituted with a hydrogen atom or one or more fluorine atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • U 1 represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having an aromatic hydrocarbon group. Any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a heteroatom, and U 1 has at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle. , is an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with one or more of the above substituents X3 .
  • U 1 is preferably an organic group having an aromatic heterocycle in which one or more carbon atoms are substituted with a hetero atom, from the viewpoint of good wavelength dispersion.
  • U1 is an organic group having an aromatic heterocycle which is a condensed ring of a 5-membered ring and a 6-membered ring, since it has good wavelength dispersion due to aligned liquid crystal molecules and exhibits high birefringence. It is more preferable.
  • U 1 preferably has a group represented by the following formula.
  • these groups have a bond with T 1 at an arbitrary position.
  • a cycloalkenyl group an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms having an aromatic hydrocarbon group (any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom), or (E 31 -A 31 ) q -B 31 -F 31 -P 31 .
  • Each of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, cycloalkenyl group, and aromatic hydrocarbon group may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents X3 , and the alkyl group is the cycloalkyl group. Alternatively, it may be substituted with a cycloalkenyl group.
  • One -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in an alkenyl group are each independently -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- or O-CO-O - may be replaced.
  • E 31 is defined in the same manner as B 31 above, and A 31 represents a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms;
  • the hydrogen atoms contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a halogen atom, -R 11 , -OR 12 , a cyano group, or a nitro group.
  • R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 12 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • B 31 , F 31 and P 31 have the same meanings as B 31 , F 31 and P 31 , respectively, and q represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • E 31 and/or A 31 may be the same or different.
  • U 2 may be substituted by one or more of the above substituents X 3 , and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s each independently represent -O-,
  • the hydrogen atom may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s are each independently More preferably, it is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may be replaced with -O-, -CO-, -COO- or -OCO-.
  • U 1 and U 2 may be combined to form a ring.
  • Y 3 and Y 4 are each selected from the following formulas (Y 3' -1) to (Y 3' -47) in view of easy availability of raw materials, good solubility, and high birefringence. It is particularly preferred to represent a group.
  • the group represented by formula (Ar-6) specifically includes groups represented by the following formulas (Ar 6 -1) to (Ar 6 -5).
  • the * part in the formula represents a connecting part with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5).
  • Cl in formula (Ar 6 -3) may be another halogen atom.
  • Compound (2) is usually a polymerizable liquid crystal compound, and it is preferable that the cured liquid crystal film obtained by aligning and polymerizing compound (2) alone is a polymerizable liquid crystal compound that exhibits so-called reverse wavelength dispersion. .
  • the mixed composition of the present invention contains at least one of compound (1) and compound (3) in addition to compound (2).
  • Compound (1) has a structure represented by A in formula (2) constituting compound (2) (i.e., a structure represented by formula (4)) on both sides of Ar, and has left and right structures centered on Ar. is a compound with a symmetric structure.
  • compound (3) has the structure represented by B in formula (2) constituting compound (2) (that is, the structure represented by formula (5)) on both sides of Ar. It is a compound that has a symmetrical structure left and right at the center.
  • Compound (1) and compound (3) are each preferably a polymerizable compound.
  • Compound (1) and compound (3) may each be a liquid crystal compound or a non-liquid crystal compound, but from the viewpoint of improving optical properties, compound (1) contained in addition to compound (2) may be used.
  • compound (3) is preferably a liquid crystal compound, and all compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3) contained in the mixed composition are liquid crystal compounds. More preferably, all of the compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3) are polymerizable liquid crystal compounds.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention may contain a plurality of polymerizable liquid crystal compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2) and/or compound (3), respectively.
  • the area percentage value of compound (2) measured by liquid chromatography is the sum of the area values of compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3) contained in the mixed composition. more than 50% and less than 95% based on
  • area percentage value means the ratio of the peak area of the target compound to the total peak area of compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3).
  • Asymmetrical liquid crystal compounds may be disadvantageous compared to symmetrical liquid crystal compounds, for example, in terms of wavelength dispersion (especially reverse wavelength dispersion) of the resulting cured liquid crystal film;
  • wavelength dispersion especially reverse wavelength dispersion
  • Optical properties superior to those of a cured liquid crystal film obtained by aligning and polymerizing a left-right symmetrical compound alone, which is said to tend to exhibit reverse wavelength dispersion, can be imparted.
  • the area percentage value of compound (2) is preferably 55% or more, more preferably 60% or more, still more preferably 65% or more, particularly preferably 70% or more. % or more, and may be, for example, 75% or more.
  • the upper limit of the area percentage value of compound (2) may be, for example, 90% or less, or 85% or less.
  • the area percentage value of compound (2) is ), calculated based on the peak area of all compounds (2) relative to the total peak area of all compounds (2) and all compounds (3).
  • the area percentage value can be calculated based on the peak area measured by liquid chromatography, and in detail, it can be measured and calculated by the method described in the Examples below.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention contains compound (2) in combination with compound (1) and/or compound (3), and the area percentage value of compound (2) exceeds 50%, so that, for example, , when a compound having a highly symmetrical structure such as compound (1) or compound (3) is used alone, and a mixed composition in which the area percentage value of the compound having a highly symmetrical structure exceeds 50%.
  • the phase transition temperature to the liquid crystal phase can be significantly lowered compared to the case of solids.
  • the liquid crystal phase transition temperature (nematic phase transition temperature) of the mixed composition of compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3) constituting the mixed composition of the present invention is
  • the temperature is preferably 120°C or lower, more preferably 115°C or lower, and may be, for example, 110°C or lower, or even 105°C or lower.
  • the phase transition temperature (nematic phase transition temperature) of the mixed composition is usually 25°C or higher, preferably 40°C or higher, and more preferably 50°C or higher.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention preferably has a phase transition temperature of 5% compared to the phase transition temperature (nematic phase transition temperature) of compound (1) or compound (3) alone.
  • the temperature can be lowered by 10°C or more, more preferably 15°C or more, particularly preferably 20°C or more, for example, 30°C or more, and even 35°C or more.
  • the phase transition temperature is preferably lowered.
  • the temperature can be lowered by 5°C or more, more preferably by 10°C or more, for example by 15°C or more, and even by 20°C or more.
  • the liquid crystal phase transition temperature can be measured using, for example, a polarizing microscope equipped with a temperature control stage, a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC), a thermogravimetric differential thermal analyzer (TG-DTA), etc. .
  • the above phase transition temperature is the same as that of the compounds corresponding to compounds (1) to (3) constituting the mixed composition and all other compounds other than the compounds corresponding to compounds (1) to (3). It means the temperature measured using a mixture of liquid crystal compounds in which the liquid crystal compounds are mixed in the same ratio as the composition in the mixed composition.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention may contain liquid crystal compounds other than compounds (1) to (3) (hereinafter referred to as " (also referred to as “other liquid crystal compounds”).
  • liquid crystal compounds include 3.2 Non-chiral rod-like liquid crystal molecules in Chapter 3, Molecular Structure and Liquid Crystal Properties, of the Liquid Crystal Handbook (edited by the Liquid Crystal Handbook Editorial Committee, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd. on October 30, 2000).
  • examples include a polymerizable liquid crystal compound that can exhibit reverse wavelength dispersion when used as a polymer, a polymerizable liquid crystal compound that can exhibit forward wavelength dispersion, and the like.
  • the content of the other liquid crystal compounds is preferably 15 parts by mass based on a total of 100 parts by mass of compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3).
  • the amount is not more than 10 parts by mass, more preferably not more than 10 parts by mass, even more preferably not more than 5 parts by mass.
  • the liquid crystal compound constituting the mixed composition of the present invention is substantially composed of a liquid crystal compound having a structure similar to that of compound (2).
  • the above-mentioned “similar” refers to, for example, side chain A (i.e., the structure represented by formula (4)) and side chain B (i.e., the structure represented by formula (5)) in compound (2).
  • Ar has a common structure.
  • the above-mentioned “substantially constitutes” refers to compounds (1) to (3) in which the content of compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3) is included in the mixed composition. This means that the amount is 90% by mass or more based on the total mass of the compound corresponding to and all other liquid crystal compounds.
  • the mixed composition does not contain any liquid crystal compounds other than compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2) and/or compound (3).
  • the mixed composition of the present invention may be composed only of compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3). From the viewpoint of improving reactivity, handling properties, etc. when compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3) are polymerized to obtain a cured liquid crystal film, the mixed composition of the present invention contains compound ( In addition to 1), compound (2), and compound (3), the composition may further contain components such as a photopolymerization initiator, an organic solvent, a polymerization inhibitor, a photosensitizer, and a leveling agent.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention contains the above-mentioned further components in addition to Compound (1), Compound (2) and Compound (3), Compound (1), Compound (3) in the mixed composition of the present invention
  • the total mass of (2) and compound (3) may be, for example, 70 to 99.5 parts by mass, preferably 80 to 99 parts by mass, and more preferably It is 85 to 98 parts by weight, more preferably 90 to 95 parts by weight. If the total mass of compound (1), compound (2) and compound (3) is within the above range, it is advantageous from the viewpoint of orientation of the obtained cured liquid crystal film.
  • the solid content of the mixed composition means the amount of all components excluding volatile components such as organic solvents from the mixed composition.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization initiator.
  • the polymerization initiator is a compound capable of initiating a polymerization reaction such as a polymerizable compound, and from the viewpoint of not depending on the phase state of the thermotropic liquid crystal, a photopolymerization initiator that generates active radicals by the action of light is preferable.
  • any known photopolymerization initiator can be used as long as it is a compound that can initiate the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound.
  • photopolymerization initiators that can generate active radicals or acids by the action of light can be mentioned, and among them, photopolymerization initiators that can generate radicals by the action of light are preferred.
  • the photopolymerization initiators can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • photopolymerization initiator a known photopolymerization initiator can be used.
  • a photopolymerization initiator that generates active radicals self-cleavable benzoin compounds, acetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, ⁇ -Aminoacetophenone compounds, oxime ester compounds, acylphosphine oxide compounds, azo compounds, etc.
  • benzophenone compounds alkylphenone compounds, benzoin ether compounds, benzyl ketal compounds, dibenzo Suberone-based compounds, anthraquinone-based compounds, xanthone-based compounds, thioxanthone-based compounds, halogenoacetophenone-based compounds, dialkoxyacetophenone-based compounds, halogenobisimidazole-based compounds, halogenotriazine-based compounds, triazine-based compounds, etc.
  • the photopolymerization initiator that generates acid
  • iodonium salts, sulfonium salts, and the like can be used.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is usually 0.1 parts by mass or more and 20 parts by mass or less, preferably 1 part by mass or more and 15 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total amount of polymerizable compounds contained in the mixed composition. part or less, more preferably 1 part by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less. Within the above range, the reaction of the polymerizable group will proceed sufficiently and the orientation of the liquid crystal compound will not be easily disturbed.
  • the term "polymerizable compound” means a compound having at least one polymerizable group.
  • the mixed composition preferably contains an organic solvent because it is usually applied to a substrate etc. in a state dissolved in an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent is preferably a solvent that can dissolve compound (2), compound (1) and/or compound (3), etc., and is preferably a solvent that is inert to the polymerization reaction of these compounds.
  • organic solvents include alcohol solvents such as methanol, ethanol, ethylene glycol, isopropyl alcohol, propylene glycol, ethylene glycol methyl ether, ethylene glycol butyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-butoxyethanol, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether.
  • Ester solvents such as ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethylene glycol methyl ether acetate, ⁇ -butyrolactone, propylene glycol methyl ether acetate and ethyl lactate; Ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone and methyl isobutyl ketone Solvents; aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents such as pentane, hexane and heptane; alicyclic hydrocarbon solvents such as ethylcyclohexane; aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene and xylene; nitrile solvents such as acetonitrile; ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dimethoxyethane Solvents: Chlorine-containing solvents such as chloroform and chlorobenzene; Amide solvents such as dimethyl chlor
  • the content of the organic solvent in the mixed composition is preferably 50 to 98 parts by weight, more preferably 50 to 95 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the mixed composition. Therefore, the solid content in 100 parts by mass of the mixed composition is preferably 2 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass. When the solid content is 50 parts by mass or less, the viscosity of the mixed composition becomes low, so that the thickness of the film upon application becomes approximately uniform, and unevenness tends to occur less easily. The above-mentioned solid content can be appropriately determined in consideration of the thickness of the cured film to be produced.
  • the mixed composition may contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the degree of progress of the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound can be controlled by the polymerization inhibitor.
  • polymerization inhibitor examples include radicals such as hydroquinone, alkoxy group-containing hydroquinone, alkoxy group-containing catechol (such as butylcatechol), pyrogallol, and 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy radical. Scavengers; thiophenols; ⁇ -naphthylamines, ⁇ -naphthols, and the like.
  • the amount is usually 0.01 to 10 parts by weight, preferably 0.1 to 5 parts by weight, and more preferably 0.1 to 3 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the total amount of polymerizable compounds.
  • content of the polymerization inhibitor is within the above range, polymerization can be carried out without disturbing the orientation of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound.
  • the mixed composition may contain a sensitizer.
  • a photosensitizer is preferred.
  • the sensitizer include xanthone compounds such as xanthone and thioxanthone (for example, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone, 2-isopropylthioxanthone, etc.); anthracene such as anthracene and anthracene containing an alkoxy group (for example, dibutoxyanthracene, etc.); Compounds include phenothiazine and rubrene.
  • the mixed composition contains a sensitizer
  • the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound contained in the mixed composition can be further promoted.
  • the content of the photosensitizer is usually 0.01 to 10 parts by mass, preferably 0.05 to 5 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.1 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total amount of polymerizable compounds. ⁇ 3 parts by mass.
  • the mixed composition may contain a leveling agent.
  • a leveling agent is an additive that has the function of adjusting the fluidity of the composition and making the film obtained by applying the composition more flat, and examples include organically modified silicone oil, polyacrylate, and perfluorinated silicone oil. Examples include alkyl leveling agents. Among these, polyacrylate leveling agents and perfluoroalkyl leveling agents are preferred.
  • the content of the leveling agent in the mixed composition is preferably 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, more preferably 0.05 to 3 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the total amount of polymerizable compounds.
  • the content of the leveling agent is within the above range, it becomes easier to horizontally align the compound (2) and the like, and the resulting cured film tends to be smoother.
  • the content of the leveling agent relative to the polymerizable compound exceeds the above range, the resulting cured film tends to be uneven.
  • the mixed composition may contain two or more types of leveling agents.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention contains compound (2), compound (1) and/or compound (3), and optionally a solvent, a photoinitiator, a polymerization inhibitor, a photosensitizer or a leveling agent. It can be prepared by adding additives such as agents and stirring and mixing at a predetermined temperature.
  • a compound having a structure corresponding to the structure of the desired compound (1), compound (2), or compound (3) is used. They can be prepared separately by esterification reaction between an alcohol compound and a carboxylic acid compound.
  • compositions of the invention comprising compound (2) in an area percentage value of greater than 50% are compound (2) prepared separately by a method as described above, and compound (1) and/or compound (3). It can also be prepared by mixing the compound (2) in a desired ratio such that the area percentage value exceeds 50%.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention in which the area percentage value of compound (2) having a left-right asymmetric structure centering on Ar exceeds 50% is, for example, compound (1) and formula (6): HO-Ar-OH (6) [Ar in formula (6) has the same meaning as Ar in formula (1) above]
  • a compound represented by formula (7) (hereinafter also referred to as "compound (6)") is reacted in the presence of a basic compound: A-Ar-OH (7) [A and Ar in formula (7) each represent the same meaning as A and Ar in formula (1) above]
  • the reaction mixture composition can be prepared as an intermediate material by a method including a step of obtaining a reaction mixture composition containing the compound represented by (hereinafter also referred to as "compound (7)").
  • compound (2) prepared separately is mixed with compound (1) and/or compound (3), it is necessary to take out compound (2).
  • compound (2) is produced by the production method, it can be obtained in an amount that is less than 50% of the theoretical amount, so when compound (2) is extracted from it, a more complicated purification step is required. According to the method of the present invention, there is no need to go through such extremely complicated purification steps, so that a desired mixed composition can be produced more efficiently.
  • an alcohol compound that can constitute the core part (structure corresponding to Ar in formula (2)) of compound (2) such as compound (6)
  • a side chain part (mesogen part) of compound (2) When prepared by combining two or more carboxylic acid compounds with different structures by esterification reaction, a mixed composition in which the area percentage value of compound (2) theoretically exceeds 50%.
  • the method includes the step of obtaining a reaction mixture composition containing compound (7) from compound (1) and compound (6), compound (2) will be obtained at a high rate of over 50%. It is easy to easily and more efficiently prepare a mixed preparation containing the following.
  • the present invention provides a reaction mixture containing a compound represented by formula (7) by reacting a compound represented by formula (1) and a compound represented by formula (6) in the presence of a basic compound.
  • the area percentage value measured by liquid chromatography of the compound represented by formula (7) in the reaction mixture includes the step of obtaining a composition (hereinafter also referred to as "step (i)").
  • the formula is more than 50% and less than 95% based on the total area value of the compound represented by formula (1), the compound represented by formula (6), and the compound represented by formula (7) included.
  • the present invention is directed to a method for producing a reaction mixture composition containing the compound represented by (7).
  • a and Ar in formula (1), formula (6), and formula (7) respectively represent the same meanings as A and Ar in the above formula (1), and ultimately form the desired structure of compound (2). Determined accordingly.
  • Compound (1) can be produced by appropriately combining and bonding known organic synthesis reactions depending on its structure. Specifically, it can be prepared from a compound having a structure corresponding to the structure of the desired compound (1), for example, according to the method described in JP-A No. 2010-31223 and the like.
  • the compound (6) which is an alcohol compound may be a compound in which two hydroxy groups are bonded to Ar corresponding to the group Ar in the desired compound (7).
  • Examples of the compound (6) include compounds in which two * moieties in each group Ar exemplified as specific examples of the formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6) above are hydroxyl groups.
  • step (1) the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) is carried out in the presence of a basic compound.
  • a basic compound in the presence of a basic compound, the hydrogen of one of the hydroxy groups (-OH) bonded to Ar of compound (6) is extracted, resulting in a transition state.
  • the molecule OH-Ar-O - makes a nucleophilic attack on one molecule of compound (1), and one side chain A [i.e., *-D 1 -(A 1 - E 1 ) m-SP 1 -L 1 ] that generates two molecules of compound (7) by causing a nucleophilic substitution reaction in the relationship with D 1 (-OCO- or -COO-) It is estimated to be.
  • the basic compound extracts hydrogen from one of the hydroxy groups bonded to Ar of compound (6) to initiate and proceed the nucleophilic substitution reaction between compound (1) and compound (6).
  • the basic compound may be an inorganic basic compound or an organic basic compound, and may be used alone or in combination of two or more. From the viewpoint that the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) can proceed more efficiently and it is easier to obtain a reaction mixture composition containing a high proportion of compound (7), the basic compound in step (i) is , a basic compound having an ionization constant (pKa) of 7 or more is preferred.
  • the ionization constant (pKa) is also called the acid dissociation constant, and is the equilibrium constant Ka in a dissociation reaction in which hydrogen ions are released from an acid, expressed as a negative common logarithm.
  • the ionization constant of a base is the ionization constant (acid dissociation constant) of the conjugate acid of the base.
  • the ionization constant of a basic compound is calculated
  • the basic compound used in step (i) preferably has a pKa of 7.5 or more, more preferably 8 or more, and even more preferably 9 or more, and the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is usually 17 or less. Yes, preferably 15 or less, more preferably 13.5 or less.
  • the pKa of the basic compound is within the above range, the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) tends to proceed efficiently, and a reaction mixture composition containing a high proportion of compound (7) is easily obtained.
  • step (i) Specific examples of the basic compound used in step (i) include N,N-dimethylaminopyridine (pKa: 9.7), diazabicycloundecene (pKa: 13.5), and triethanolamine (pKa: 13.5). : 10.75), N-methylmorpholine (pKa: 7.38), 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (pKa: 8.7), N,N-diisopropylethylamine (pKa: 10. 98), potassium tert-butoxide (pKa: 17), and the like.
  • N,N-dimethylaminopyridine, diazabicycloundecene, and triethanolamine are preferred, and N,N-dimethylaminopyridine and diazabicycloundecene are more preferred.
  • the amount of the basic compound used in step (i) may be appropriately determined depending on the type of basic compound used, the desired proportion of compound (7) in the reaction mixture composition, etc.
  • the amount is preferably 0.01 mol or more, more preferably 0.05 mol or more, even more preferably 0.1 mol or more, and preferably 10 mol or less, more preferably 1 mol or more of compound (6). is 5 mol or less, more preferably 3 mol or less, particularly preferably 1 mol or less.
  • the amount of the basic compound is within the above range, the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) tends to proceed efficiently, and a reaction mixture composition containing a high proportion of compound (7) is easily obtained.
  • the total content of basic compounds having a pKa of 7 or more is within the above range.
  • step (i) the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent.
  • the solvent include the same organic solvents as exemplified as those that can be included in the mixed composition of the present invention. These solvents can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, the organic solvent may be the same as or different from the organic solvent constituting the mixed composition of the present invention.
  • ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP), etc.
  • amide solvents such as cyclopentanone, ketone solvents such as cyclopentanone, etc. are preferred.
  • the amount of the solvent used is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 part by mass per 1 part by mass of compound (1) and compound (6) in order to sufficiently dissolve each compound and allow the reaction to proceed efficiently. As mentioned above, the amount is preferably 1.2 parts by mass or more, and in order to avoid using an excessive amount of solvent, it is usually 50 parts by mass or less, preferably 30 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or less.
  • Additives may be used in the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) as necessary. For example, it may be carried out in the presence of a polymerization inhibitor to prevent polymerization.
  • a polymerization inhibitor examples include 2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-cresol (BHT), 2,2'-methylenebis(6-tert-butyl-p-cresol), triphenyl phosphite, and Examples include tris(nonylphenyl) phosphate, phenothiazine, and the like.
  • BHT 2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-cresol
  • the amount added is preferably 0.01 mol or more, more preferably 0.05 mol or more, and preferably 1.0 mol equivalent per 1 mol of compound (1). It is as follows.
  • the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) can be carried out in a state in which compound (1), compound (6), a basic compound, and, if necessary, a solvent, additives, etc. are mixed.
  • the reaction temperature between compound (1) and compound (6) is preferably 0°C to 80°C, more preferably 20°C to 60°C.
  • the reaction temperature is within the above range, the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) tends to proceed, and the mild conditions make it easier to obtain the target compound more safely.
  • the reaction time may be determined depending on the type of compound used, blending ratio, reaction temperature, etc. Depending on the reaction scale, etc., the time is preferably 10 minutes to 48 hours, more preferably 10 minutes to 24 hours.
  • the reaction time between compound (1) and compound (6) starts from the time when compound (1), compound (6), and the basic compound begin to coexist; )
  • the end point is the point at which the reaction with the reaction mixture stops/completes.
  • the degree of progress of the reaction can be confirmed by analytical means such as high performance liquid chromatography, thin layer chromatography, and gas chromatography.
  • the structure of the obtained compound can be identified by measurements such as NMR spectrum, IR spectrum, mass spectrum, elemental analysis, etc.
  • the area percentage value measured by liquid chromatography of compound (7) in the reaction mixture composition containing compound (7) obtained in step (i) is the area percentage value of compound (1) and compound (6) contained in the reaction mixture composition. It is preferably more than 50% and less than 95% based on the total area value of compound (7).
  • the reaction mixture composition contains compound (7) in an amount exceeding 50% in terms of area percentage
  • the reaction mixture composition contains compound (2) in an amount exceeding 50% in terms of area percentage.
  • a mixed composition of the invention can be obtained.
  • the progress of the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) in step (i) is controlled to increase the amount of compound (1) and compound (6) in addition to the amount of compound (7) in the resulting reaction mixture composition.
  • the mixture of the present invention containing a high proportion of compound (2) and the required amount of compound (1) and/or compound (3) can be prepared through step (ii) described below.
  • a composition can be obtained.
  • the amount of compound (7) contained in the reaction mixture composition can be appropriately determined depending on the blending ratio of compound (2) in the mixture composition of the present invention finally containing the desired compound (2), For example, it may be 55% or more, 60% or more, 65% or more, or 70% or more, and may be, for example, 90% or less, or 85% or less.
  • the content of compound (7) is 75% or more in area percentage value. It is preferable.
  • a reaction mixture composition containing compound (7) in such a proportion is suitable as an intermediate material for obtaining the mixture composition of the present invention having a low phase transition temperature.
  • the area percentage value can be calculated based on the peak area measured by liquid chromatography in the same manner as described above for the mixed composition of the present invention.
  • step (i) and step (ii) are performed continuously, for example, there is no need to perform purification or extraction operations, which is preferable from the viewpoint of production efficiency and workability.
  • step (i) and step (ii) discontinuously for example, the amount of impurities generated in step (i) carried into step (ii) can be reduced, resulting in high purity. This is preferable from the viewpoint that it is possible to obtain the following products.
  • a 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 in formula (8) have the same meanings as A 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 in formula (5) above, respectively, and the final is determined depending on the desired structure of compound (2).
  • Compound (8) can be produced by appropriately combining and bonding known organic synthesis reactions depending on its structure. Specifically, it can be prepared from a compound having a structure corresponding to the structure of the desired compound (8), for example, according to the method described in JP-A No. 2010-31223 and the like.
  • the reaction between compound (7) and compound (8) in the reaction mixture is an esterification reaction, and is preferably carried out in the presence of a condensing agent.
  • a condensing agent By performing the esterification reaction in the presence of a condensing agent, the esterification reaction can be performed efficiently and quickly.
  • condensing agent used in step (ii) examples include 1-cyclohexyl-3-(2-morpholinoethyl)carbodiimidemeth-para-toluenesulfonate, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylamino Carbodiimides such as propyl)carbodiimide, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (commercially available as water-soluble carbodiimide: WSC), bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)carbodiimide, and bis(trimethylsilyl)carbodiimide Compound, 2-methyl-6-nitrobenzoic anhydride, 2,2'-carbonylbis-1H-imidazole, 1,1'-oxalyldiimidazole, diphenylphosphoryl azide, 1-(4-
  • dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide, and 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide are used as condensing agents.
  • the amount of the condensing agent used in the esterification reaction between compound (7) and compound (8) can be appropriately determined depending on the types of compound (7) and compound (8), the type of condensing agent, etc. For example, the amount is usually 1.0 to 1.5 mol per 1 mol of compound (7).
  • the esterification reaction may be performed in the presence of a catalyst.
  • a catalyst examples include N,N-dimethylaminopyridine, N,N-dimethylaniline, dimethylammonium pentafluorobenzenesulfonate, and the like.
  • the amount of the catalyst used is, for example, preferably 0.01 to 0.5 mol per 1 mol of compound (7).
  • the esterification reaction between compound (7) and compound (8) in step (ii) is usually carried out in a solvent.
  • the solvent include the same solvents as those exemplified as those that can be used in the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) in step (i).
  • the solvent used in step (ii) may be the same as or different from step (i).
  • nonpolar organic solvents such as pentane, hexane, heptane, toluene, xylene, benzene, chlorobenzene, chloroform, and dichloromethane are preferred. These solvents may be used alone or in combination.
  • the amount of compound (8) to be used is preferably 0.5 to 2.5 mol, more preferably 0.5 to 2.5 mol, per 1 mol of compound (7), from the viewpoint of easily obtaining the desired amount of compound (2) in good yield. is 0.75 to 2.0 mol, more preferably 1.0 to 1.3 mol.
  • the amount of the solvent used is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 100 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 70 parts by mass, based on 1 part by mass of compound (7) and compound (8). Parts by weight, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by weight.
  • the temperature of the esterification reaction in step (ii) is preferably -20 to 120°C, more preferably -20 to 60°C, still more preferably -10 to 20°C, from the viewpoint of reaction yield and productivity. It is °C.
  • the esterification reaction time is preferably 1 minute to 72 hours, more preferably 1 to 48 hours, and still more preferably 1 to 24 hours.
  • the reaction time between compound (7) and compound (8) is determined from the time when compound (7) and compound (8) begin to coexist. The end point is when the reaction has stopped/completed. The degree of progress of the reaction can be confirmed by analytical means such as high performance liquid chromatography, thin layer chromatography, and gas chromatography.
  • the structure of the obtained compound can be identified by measurements such as NMR spectrum, IR spectrum, mass spectrum, elemental analysis, etc. After the reaction is completed, as necessary, for example, by performing treatments and operations that can be adopted in organic synthetic chemistry, such as post-treatments such as filtration, neutralization, extraction, and water washing, and isolation treatments such as distillation and crystallization.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention containing compound (2) can be obtained as a mixture of liquid crystal compounds.
  • a mixed composition obtained in this way, to which necessary components such as an organic solvent and a photopolymerization initiator as described above are added, can be used as a mixed composition for forming a retardation film.
  • the present invention also relates to a retardation film that is a cured product of the mixed composition of the present invention and includes a cured liquid crystal film formed by curing the liquid crystal compound in the mixed composition in an oriented state.
  • a retardation film composed of a cured product of the mixed composition can sufficiently exhibit the optical properties that the liquid crystal compound used can originally exhibit, and can be a retardation film having high optical performance.
  • the cured liquid crystal film constituting the retardation film of the present invention may be composed of a homopolymer of compound (2) in an oriented state and a homopolymer of compound (1) and/or compound (3), or , compound (2), and a copolymer of a mixture of compound (1) and/or compound (3) in an oriented state. Since the polymerization reaction is easy and it is easy to obtain a uniform liquid crystal cured film, the liquid crystal cured film constituting the retardation film of the present invention can be prepared using compound (2) and a mixture of compound (1) and/or compound (3). Preferably, it is composed of a copolymer in an oriented state.
  • the retardation film of the present invention is a cured product of the mixed composition of the present invention, and satisfies the optical properties represented by the following formulas (a), (b), and (c). preferable.
  • a cured liquid crystal film is usually a cured product (hereinafter referred to as a cured product) obtained by curing compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3) in a state in which they are oriented horizontally with respect to the plane of the cured liquid crystal film. (also referred to as "horizontal alignment liquid crystal cured film").
  • Re ( ⁇ ) represents the in-plane retardation value of the liquid crystal cured film at the wavelength ⁇ nm
  • Re (nx ( ⁇ ) - ny ( ⁇ )) ⁇ d (d is the thickness of the liquid crystal cured film.
  • nx represents the principal refractive index at a wavelength ⁇ nm in a direction parallel to the plane of the liquid crystal cured film
  • ny represents the refractive index ellipsoid formed by the liquid crystal cured film.
  • nx represents the refractive index at a wavelength ⁇ nm in a direction parallel to the plane of the cured liquid crystal film and perpendicular to the direction of nx).
  • the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film When the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film satisfies formulas (a) and (b), the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film has an in-plane retardation value at a short wavelength that is smaller than an in-plane retardation value at a long wavelength. It exhibits so-called reverse wavelength dispersion.
  • Re(450)/Re(550) is preferably 0.70 or more, more preferably 0.72 or more, and even more preferably It is 0.75 or more, and preferably 0.90 or less, more preferably 0.87 or less, even more preferably 0.85 or less, particularly preferably 0.83 or less.
  • Re(650)/Re(550) is preferably 1.00 or more, more preferably 1.01 or more, and even more preferably 1.02 or more.
  • the retardation film including the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film functions as a ⁇ /4 plate
  • the elliptically polarizing plate includes the retardation film including the liquid crystal cured film. It has an excellent effect of improving the hue of frontal reflection (effect of suppressing coloring) when applied to optical displays and the like.
  • a more preferable range of the in-plane retardation value is 120 nm ⁇ Re(550) ⁇ 170 nm, and an even more preferable range is 130 nm ⁇ Re(550) ⁇ 150 nm.
  • the retardation film of the present invention includes, for example, A coating film of the mixed composition of the present invention is formed, the coating film is dried, and a polymerizable liquid crystal compound containing the compound (2) in the mixed composition (hereinafter, liquid crystal curing contained in the mixed composition) is dried.
  • a step of orienting compounds that can constitute a film also simply referred to as a "polymerizable liquid crystal compound”
  • It can be produced by a method including a step of polymerizing the polymerizable liquid crystal compound by light irradiation while maintaining the alignment state to form a cured liquid crystal film.
  • a coating film of the mixed composition can be formed by applying the mixed composition onto a substrate or an alignment film.
  • the base material any base material known in the art, such as a glass base material or a resin film base material, may be appropriately selected and used.
  • alignment films optical films (especially alignment films) such as alignment films containing alignment polymers, optical alignment films, groove alignment films having uneven patterns or a plurality of grooves on the surface, and stretched films stretched in the alignment direction are used.
  • An alignment film generally used for producing a retardation film can be appropriately selected and used.
  • Methods for applying the mixed composition to the substrate include coating methods such as spin coating, extrusion, gravure coating, die coating, bar coating, and applicator methods, and printing methods such as flexography. Known methods may be used.
  • a dry coating film is formed.
  • the drying method include natural drying, ventilation drying, heating drying, and reduced pressure drying.
  • the heating temperature of the coating film can be determined as appropriate by considering the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used and the material of the base material forming the coating film, etc., but it is usually , the temperature must be higher than the liquid crystal phase transition temperature.
  • the liquid crystal phase transition temperature (smectic phase transition temperature or nematic phase transition temperature) of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the mixed composition is adjusted. (phase transition temperature) or higher.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention contains at least compound (2), compound (1) and/or compound (3), and usually produces liquid crystals at a temperature lower than the temperature at which each individual compound transitions to a liquid crystal phase. can transition to a phase. Therefore, in manufacturing a retardation film using the mixed composition of the present invention, not only can a retardation film with excellent optical properties be obtained, but also excessive consumption of thermal energy can be suppressed, resulting in production efficiency. can be improved. Furthermore, since the liquid crystal phase transition can be effected by heating at a relatively low temperature, there is an advantage that the choice of supporting substrates to which the mixed composition is applied is expanded.
  • the heating time can be appropriately determined depending on the heating temperature, the type of polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained, the type of solvent, its boiling point, its amount, etc., but is usually 15 seconds to 10 minutes, preferably 0.5 ⁇ 5 minutes.
  • Removal of the solvent from the coating film may be performed simultaneously with heating the liquid crystal compound contained in the mixed composition to a temperature equal to or higher than the liquid crystal phase transition temperature, or may be performed separately, but from the viewpoint of improving productivity, it may be performed simultaneously. It is preferable. Before heating the polymerizable liquid crystal compound to a temperature higher than the liquid crystal phase transition temperature, the solvent in the coating film obtained from the mixed composition is appropriately removed under conditions such that the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the coating film obtained from the mixed composition does not polymerize. A preliminary drying step may be provided for this purpose.
  • Drying methods in this pre-drying step include natural drying, ventilation drying, heating drying, and vacuum drying, and the drying temperature (heating temperature) in this drying step depends on the type of polymerizable liquid crystal compound used and the solvent used. It can be determined as appropriate depending on the type, boiling point, amount, etc.
  • the polymerizable liquid crystal compound is polymerized by light irradiation while maintaining the orientation state of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound, thereby forming a polymer of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound existing in the desired orientation state.
  • a certain liquid crystal cured film is formed. Since the mixed composition of the present invention can be highly polymerized by irradiation with light such as high-intensity ultraviolet rays while suppressing damage to the polymerizable liquid crystal compound, a photopolymerization method is usually used as the polymerization method. It will be done.
  • the light irradiated onto the dry coating film is appropriately selected depending on the type of polymerization initiator, the type of polymerizable liquid crystal compound, and the amount thereof contained in the dry coating film.
  • Specific examples include one or more types of light selected from the group consisting of visible light, ultraviolet light, infrared light, X-rays, ⁇ -rays, ⁇ -rays, and ⁇ -rays, and active electron beams.
  • ultraviolet light is preferable because it is easy to control the progress of the polymerization reaction and it is possible to use photopolymerization equipment that is widely used in the field. It is preferable to select the types of polymerizable liquid crystal compound and polymerization initiator contained in the mixed composition in advance.
  • the polymerization temperature can also be controlled by irradiating the dry coating film with light while cooling it with an appropriate cooling means.
  • a cooling means By employing such a cooling means and polymerizing the polymerizable liquid crystal compound at a lower temperature, a cured liquid crystal film can be appropriately formed even if a substrate with relatively low heat resistance is used. It is also possible to promote the polymerization reaction by increasing the polymerization temperature within a range that does not cause problems due to heat during light irradiation (such as deformation of the base material due to heat).
  • a patterned cured film can also be obtained by performing masking or development during photopolymerization.
  • Examples of the light source of the active energy ray include a low-pressure mercury lamp, a medium-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high-pressure mercury lamp, a xenon lamp, a halogen lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a tungsten lamp, a gallium lamp, an excimer laser, and a wavelength range.
  • Examples include an LED light source that emits light in the range of 380 to 440 nm, a chemical lamp, a black light lamp, a microwave-excited mercury lamp, and a metal halide lamp.
  • the ultraviolet irradiation intensity is usually 10 to 3,000 mW/cm 2 .
  • the ultraviolet irradiation intensity is preferably in a wavelength range effective for activating the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the time for irradiating the light is usually 0.1 seconds to 10 minutes, preferably 0.1 seconds to 5 minutes, more preferably 0.1 seconds to 3 minutes, and even more preferably 0.1 seconds to 1 minute. be.
  • the cumulative amount of light is 10 to 3,000 mJ/cm 2 , preferably 50 to 2,000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 100 to 1,000 mJ/cm It is 2 .
  • the thickness of the liquid crystal cured film can be selected as appropriate depending on the display device to which it is applied.
  • the thickness is preferably 0.2 to 3 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.2 to 2 ⁇ m.
  • the present invention includes a circularly polarizing plate containing the retardation film of the present invention.
  • the circularly polarizing plate of the present invention usually includes a polarizing film.
  • the polarizing film is a film having a polarizing function, and includes a stretched film on which a dye having absorption anisotropy is adsorbed, a film containing a film coated with a dye having absorption anisotropy as a polarizer, and the like.
  • a polarizing film for example, a known polarizing film used for a circularly polarizing plate as described in JP-A-2013-33249, JP-A-2013-200445, etc. can be used.
  • the circularly polarizing plate of the present invention includes the retardation film of the present invention and the polarizing film.
  • the retardation film of the present invention and the polarizing film are combined with an adhesive layer or a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • the circularly polarizing plate of the present invention can be obtained by laminating the two layers with each other.
  • the angle between the slow axis (optical axis) of the liquid crystal cured film constituting the retardation film and the absorption axis of the polarizing film is It is preferable to stack the layers so that the angle is 45 ⁇ 5°.
  • the circularly polarizing plate of the present invention may have a configuration similar to that of a conventional general circularly polarizing plate, or a polarizing film and a retardation film.
  • Such structures include, for example, adhesive layers (sheets) for bonding circularly polarizing plates to display elements, etc. that constitute image display devices, and adhesive layers (sheets) for protecting the surfaces of polarizing films and retardation films from scratches and dirt. Examples include a protective film used for this purpose.
  • a display device is a device having a display element, and includes a light emitting element or a light emitting device as a light emitting source.
  • Examples of the display device include a liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, an inorganic electroluminescence (EL) display device, a flexible image display device, a touch panel display device, an electron emission display device (for example, a field emission display (FED)), surface field emission display (SED)), electronic paper (display device using electronic ink or electrophoretic element, plasma display device, projection type display device (e.g.
  • Liquid crystal display devices include transmissive liquid crystal display devices, transflective liquid crystal display devices, reflective liquid crystal display devices, direct-view liquid crystal display devices, and projection type liquid crystal display devices. These display devices may be display devices that display two-dimensional images or stereoscopic display devices that display three-dimensional images.
  • the circularly polarizing plate of the present invention can be suitably used for organic electroluminescent (EL) display devices and inorganic electroluminescent (EL) display devices. These display devices (optical displays) can be used by providing the circularly polarizing plate of the present invention with excellent optical properties. , it is possible to exhibit good image display characteristics.
  • HPLC measurement used for analysis of each compound may be performed under any conditions as long as peaks derived from each compound can be separated.
  • An example of HPLC measurement conditions is shown below.
  • Measurement condition Measuring device: HPLC LC-10AT (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) Column: L-Column ODS (inner diameter 3.0 mm, length 150 mm, particle size 3 ⁇ m) Temperature: 40°C Mobile phase A: 0.1% (v/v)-TFA/water Mobile phase B: 0.1% (v/v)-TFA/acetonitrile Gradient: 0 min 50%-B 30min 100%-B 60min 100%-B 60.01min 50%-B 75min 50%-B Flow rate: 0.5mL/min Injection volume: 5 ⁇ L Detection wavelength: 350nm
  • the ionization constant (pKa) of the basic compound used in the examples was measured by a pH characteristic solubility method.
  • Example 1 Mixed composition 1 containing compound (P1-1), compound (P2-1) and compound (P3-1) was obtained according to the following method.
  • Example 2 Mixed composition 2 containing compound (P2-1) and compound (P3-1) was obtained according to the following method. A nitrogen atmosphere was placed in a 300 mL four-necked flask equipped with a Dimroth condenser and a thermometer, and 5.0 g of compound (6a) synthesized with reference to patent document (JP 2010-031223), patent document (JP 2010-031223). 28.7 g of compound (1a) synthesized with reference to No.
  • Example 3 Mixed composition 3 containing compound (P1-1) and compound (P2-1) was obtained according to the following method. A nitrogen atmosphere was placed in a 300 mL four-necked flask equipped with a Dimroth condenser and a thermometer, and 5.0 g of compound (6a) synthesized with reference to patent document (JP 2010-031223), patent document (JP 2010-031223). 10.3 g of compound (1a) synthesized with reference to No.
  • composition 4 did not contain a compound corresponding to compound (2).
  • phase transition temperature is measured using a polarizing microscope equipped with a temperature control stage, a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC), a thermogravimetric differential thermal analyzer (TG-DTA), etc. can be measured. Specifically, the measurement was performed using a polarizing microscope (LEXT, manufactured by Olympus Corporation) equipped with a temperature control stage in accordance with the following. 1 g of each of the mixed compositions 1 to 5 obtained above was weighed into a vial, and 2 g of chloroform was added and dissolved. The obtained solution was applied to a rubbed glass substrate with a PVA alignment film and dried.
  • DSC differential scanning calorimeter
  • TG-DTA thermogravimetric differential thermal analyzer
  • This substrate was placed on a cooling/heating device ("LNP94-2" manufactured by Japan Hitech), heated from room temperature to 180° C., and then cooled to room temperature.
  • the changes in temperature were observed using a polarizing microscope (LEXT, manufactured by Olympus), and the temperature at which the nematic phase occurred was measured, which was defined as the nematic phase transition temperature.
  • the results are shown in Table 2.
  • Polymerization initiator 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinophenyl)butan-1-one (Irgacure 369; manufactured by BASF Japan)
  • Leveling agent polyacrylate compound (BYK-361N; manufactured by BYK Chemie Japan)
  • Polymerization inhibitor BHT (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • Solvent N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP; manufactured by Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd.)
  • composition for forming photoalignment film A composition for forming a photo-alignment film was obtained by mixing the following components and stirring the resulting mixture at 80° C. for 1 hour.
  • Photoalignable material (5 parts) represented by the following formula: (Number average molecular weight: approx. 28,000)
  • An optical film was manufactured as follows. Cycloolefin polymer film (COP) (ZF-14, manufactured by Zeon Corporation) was processed using a corona treatment device (AGF-B10, manufactured by Kasuga Denki Co., Ltd.) at an output of 0.3 kW and a processing speed of 3 m/min. Treated once.
  • the photo-alignment film forming composition was applied to the corona-treated surface using a bar coater. It was dried at 80° C. for 1 minute, and exposed to polarized UV light using a polarized UV irradiation device (SPOT CURE SP-7; manufactured by Ushio Inc.) at an integrated light intensity of 100 mJ/cm 2 .
  • the thickness of the obtained alignment film was measured using a laser microscope (LEXT, manufactured by Olympus Corporation) and was found to be 100 nm.
  • Polymerizable liquid crystal composition 1 was applied onto the alignment film using a spin coater, dried at 120°C for 1 minute, and then exposed to ultraviolet light using a high-pressure mercury lamp (Unicure VB-15201BY-A, manufactured by Ushio Inc.).
  • An optical film was produced by irradiating (under nitrogen atmosphere, wavelength: 365 nm, integrated light amount at wavelength 365 nm: 1000 mJ/cm 2 ).
  • the front retardation value for light with a wavelength of 450 nm and a wavelength of 550 nm was measured using a measuring device ("KOBRA-WR" manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments Co., Ltd.), and Re(450) was measured. /Re(550) was calculated.
  • Table 2 The results are shown in Table 2.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a mixed composition for a polymerizable liquid crystal compound that has a low phase transition temperature and is preferably suited to production of a retardation film that has excellent optical characteristics.

Description

混合組成物、位相差フィルム、円偏光板、混合組成物の製造方法Mixed composition, retardation film, circularly polarizing plate, method for producing mixed composition
 本発明は、混合組成物、前記混合組成物の硬化物を含む位相差フィルム、前記位相差フィルムを含む円偏光板、前記混合組成物の製造方法、および、前記混合組成物の製造に用い得る反応混合組成物の製造方法、に関する。 The present invention provides a mixed composition, a retardation film including a cured product of the mixed composition, a circularly polarizing plate including the retardation film, a method for producing the mixed composition, and a method for producing the mixed composition. The present invention relates to a method for producing a reaction mixture composition.
 各種画像表示装置等に用いられる位相差フィルムには、その特性の1つとして全波長領域において偏光変換可能であることが求められており、例えば[Re(450)/Re(550)]<1の逆波長分散性を示す波長域では、理論上、一様の偏光変換が可能であることが知られている。重合して硬化させた際に逆波長分散性を発現するような重合性液晶化合物は、いわゆるT字型またはH型の分子構造を有するものが多く知られており、特に、T字型やH型の中心となる構造(コア構造)を中心として長軸方向にのびる基(側鎖)の構造が左右対称であると、より強く逆波長分散性を発現できる傾向がある。 Retardation films used in various image display devices are required to be capable of polarization conversion in the entire wavelength range as one of their characteristics, for example, [Re(450)/Re(550)]<1 It is known that uniform polarization conversion is theoretically possible in a wavelength range exhibiting reverse wavelength dispersion. Many polymerizable liquid crystal compounds that exhibit reverse wavelength dispersion when polymerized and cured are known to have a so-called T-shaped or H-shaped molecular structure. When the structure of the groups (side chains) extending in the long axis direction around the central structure (core structure) of the mold is bilaterally symmetrical, there is a tendency for stronger reverse wavelength dispersion to be exhibited.
 一方、重合性液晶化合物の分子構造によっては溶剤への溶解性が劣ったり、光学フィルムの光学特性が低下したりすることがあるところ、構造の異なる複数種の重合性液晶化合物を混合することにより、上記のような問題の解決が試みられている(例えば、特許文献1および2) On the other hand, depending on the molecular structure of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound, the solubility in solvents may be poor or the optical properties of the optical film may deteriorate. , attempts have been made to solve the above problems (for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2)
国際出願公開第2018/123622号International Application Publication No. 2018/123622 国際出願公開第2019/160025号International Application Publication No. 2019/160025
 重合性液晶化合物を溶剤に溶解させて得られる塗工液を支持基材に塗布して塗膜を形成した後、塗膜に含まれる重合性液晶化合物を液晶相状態へ転移させ、溶剤を留去することによって位相差フィルム等の光学フィルムを得ることができる。しかしながら、上記特許文献に開示されるような従来の液晶混合物は相転移温度が高く、製膜時において必要となる高温下での加熱は、製膜性の低下のみならず、得られる光学フィルムの光学特性の低下を生じる原因となり得る。 A coating solution obtained by dissolving a polymerizable liquid crystal compound in a solvent is applied to a supporting substrate to form a coating film, and then the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the coating film is transferred to a liquid crystal phase state, and the solvent is retained. By removing the film, an optical film such as a retardation film can be obtained. However, conventional liquid crystal mixtures such as those disclosed in the above patent documents have a high phase transition temperature, and heating at high temperatures required during film formation not only deteriorates film formability but also improves the quality of the resulting optical film. This may cause deterioration of optical properties.
 本発明は、相転移温度が低く、好ましくは、優れた光学特性を有する位相差フィルムの製造に好適な重合性液晶化合物の混合組成物を提供することを目的とする。 An object of the present invention is to provide a mixed composition of polymerizable liquid crystal compounds suitable for producing a retardation film having a low phase transition temperature and preferably excellent optical properties.
 本発明は、以下の好適な態様を提供するものである。
[1]下記式(2)で表される化合物と、式(1)で表される化合物および式(3)で表される化合物のうちの少なくとも1つとを含む混合組成物であって、式(2)で表される化合物の液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した面積百分率値が、混合組成物に含まれる式(1)で表される化合物、式(2)で表される化合物および式(3)で表される化合物の面積値の合計に基づいて、50%を超え95%未満である、混合組成物。
 A-Ar-A   (1)
 A-Ar-B   (2)
 B-Ar-B   (3)
 [式(1)および式(2)中のAは、下記式(4):
 *-D-(A-E)m-SP-L   (4)
で表され、
 式(2)および式(3)中のBは、下記式(5):
 *-D-(A-E)n-SP-L   (5)
で表され、
 式(4)および式(5)中、
 *は式(1)、式(2)または式(3)中のArとの結合位置を表し、
 mおよびnは、それぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、かつ、mとnとは互いに異なり、
 DおよびDは、それぞれ独立に、-C(=O)-O-または-O-C(=O)-を表し、
 EおよびEは、それぞれ独立に、単結合、または、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-C(=S)-、-CR-、-CR=CR-、-NR-、若しくは、これらの2以上の組み合わせからなる2価の連結基を表し、R~Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるEは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、nが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるEは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、
 AおよびAは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の2価の芳香族炭化水素基、または、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の2価の脂環式炭化水素基を表し、mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるAは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、nが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるAは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、
 SPおよびSPは、それぞれ独立に、単結合、炭素数1~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルケニレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキニレン基、または、前記アルキレン基、前記アルケニレン基および前記アルキニレン基を構成する-CH-の1以上が-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(Q)-、若しくは、-CO-に置換された2価の連結基を表し、Qは置換基を表し、
 LおよびLは、それぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、LおよびLの少なくとも一方は重合性基であり、
 式(1)~(3)中のArは、下記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)のいずれかで表される基である:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
〔式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)中、
 *は、DまたはDとの結合部を表す;
 Qは-S-、-O-または-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表し、
 Qは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
 WおよびWは、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
 Yは炭素数1~6のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 YはCN基または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-、-CO-、-O-CO-または-CO-O-で置換されていてもよい;
 Z、ZおよびZは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表し、ZおよびZは、互いに結合して芳香環または芳香族複素環を形成してもよく、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
 Zは、炭素数2~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
 Axは芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、Ayは水素原子、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基、または芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、AxとAyは結合して環を形成してもよい;
 YおよびYは、それぞれ独立して、下記式(Y-1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
〔式(Y-1)中、
 RY1は水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基は、1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、置換基Xは、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子、ペンタフルオロスルフラニル基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、イソシアノ基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシル基、メルカプト基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ジイソプロピルアミノ基、トリメチルシリル基、ジメチルシリル基、チオイソシアノ基、または、1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-が各々独立して-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖状または分岐状アルキル基を表し、該アルキル基中の任意の水素原子はフッ素原子に置換されてもよく、或いは、-B31-F31-P31で表される基であってもよく(ここで、B31は、-CR-、-CH-CH-、-O-、-S-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-C(=S)-O-、-O-C(=S)-、-O-C(=S)-O-、-CO-NR-、-NR-CO-、-O-CH-、-CH-O-、-S-CH-、-CH-S-または単結合を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し;F31は、炭素数1~12のアルカンジイル基を表し、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる水素原子は、-OR10またはハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、R10は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-または-CO-で置き換わっていてもよく;P31は、水素原子または重合性基を表す)、
 Uは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよく、芳香族炭化水素基は、1つ以上の前記置換基Xによって置換されていてもよい;
 Tは、-O-、-S-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCO-O-、-NU-、-N=CU-、-CO-NU-、-OCO-NU-またはO-NU-を表し、Uは水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基、芳香族炭化水素基(該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよい)を有する炭素数2~30の有機基、または(E31-A31-B31-F31-P31を表し、該アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基および芳香族炭化水素基はそれぞれ、無置換であるかまたは1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基は該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基によって置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-SO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよく、該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-またはO-CO-O-に置き換えられてもよく、E31は前記B31と同様に定義され、A31は、炭素数3~16の2価の脂環式炭化水素基または炭素数6~20の2価の芳香族炭化水素基を表し、該脂環式炭化水素基および該芳香族炭化水素基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子、-R11、-OR12、シアノ基またはニトロ基で置換されていてもよく、R11は、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、R12は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよく、B31、F31およびP31は、それぞれ、前記B31、F31およびP31と同じ意味を有し、qは0~4の整数を表し、E31および/またはA31が複数存在する場合は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、UとUとが結合して環を構成していてもよい〕
から選ばれる基を表す。]
[2]式(4)中のmおよび式(5)中のnの一方が1であり、他方が2である、前記[1]に記載の混合組成物。
[3]式(4)中のAおよび式(5)中のAが、それぞれ独立に、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基または1,4-フェニレンジイル基である、前記[1]または[2]に記載の混合組成物。
[4]式(4)中、mが1であり、かつ、Aが1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基である、前記[1]~[3]のいずれかに記載の混合組成物。
[5]式(5)中、nが1であり、かつ、Aが1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基である、前記[1]~[4]のいずれかに記載の混合組成物。
[6]式(4)中のLおよび式(5)中のLが、それぞれ、アクリロイルオキシ基である、前記[1]~[5]のいずれかに記載の混合組成物。
[7]式(1)~(3)中のArが、式(Ar-1)、式(Ar-3)および式(Ar-4)のいずれかで表される基である、前記[1]~[6]のいずれかに記載の混合組成物。
[8]光重合開始剤をさらに含む、前記[1]~[7]のいずれかに記載の混合組成物。
[9]有機溶剤をさらに含む、前記[1]~[8]のいずれかに記載の混合組成物。
[10]前記[1]~[9]のいずれかに記載の混合組成物の硬化物を含む位相差フィルム。
[11]前記[10]に記載の位相差フィルムを含む円偏光板。
[12]式(1)で表される化合物と式(6)で表される化合物とを、塩基性化合物の存在下で反応させて、式(7)で表される化合物を含む反応混合組成物を得る工程を含み、前記反応混合物における式(7)で表される化合物の液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した面積百分率値が、反応混合組成物に含まれる式(1)で表される化合物、式(6)で表される化合物および式(7)で表される化合物の面積値の合計に基づいて50%を超え95%未満である、式(7)で表される化合物を含む反応混合組成物の製造方法。
 A-Ar-A     (1)
 HO-Ar-OH   (6)
 A-Ar-OH    (7)
 [式(1)および式(7)中のAは、下記式(4):
 *-D-(A-E)m-SP-L   (4)
で表され、
 式(4)中、*は式(1)または式(7)中のArとの結合位置を表し、
 mは1以上の整数を表し、
 Dは、-C(=O)-O-または-O-C(=O)-を表し、
 Eは、単結合、または、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-C(=S)-、-CR-、-CR=CR-、-NR-、若しくは、これらの2以上の組み合わせからなる2価の連結基を表し、R~Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるEは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、
 Aは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の2価の芳香族炭化水素基、または、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の2価の脂環式炭化水素基を表し、mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるAは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、
 SPは、単結合、炭素数1~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルケニレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキニレン基、または、前記アルキレン基、前記アルケニレン基および前記アルキニレン基を構成する-CH-の1以上が-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(Q)-、若しくは、-CO-に置換された2価の連結基を表し、Qは置換基を表し、
 Lは、1価の有機基を表し、
 式(1)、式(6)および式(7)中のArは、下記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)のいずれかで表される基である:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
〔式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)中、
 *は、DまたはDとの結合部を表す;
 Qは-S-、-O-または-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表し、
 Qは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
 WおよびWは、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
 Yは炭素数1~6のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 YはCN基または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-、-CO-、-O-CO-または-CO-O-で置換されていてもよい;
 Z、ZおよびZは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表し、ZおよびZは、互いに結合して芳香環または芳香族複素環を形成してもよく、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
 Zは、炭素数2~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
 Axは芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、Ayは水素原子、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基、または芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、AxとAyは結合して環を形成してもよい;
 YおよびYは、それぞれ独立して、下記式(Y-1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
〔式(Y-1)中、
 RY1は水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基は、1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、置換基Xは、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子、ペンタフルオロスルフラニル基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、イソシアノ基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシル基、メルカプト基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ジイソプロピルアミノ基、トリメチルシリル基、ジメチルシリル基、チオイソシアノ基、または、1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-が各々独立して-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖状または分岐状アルキル基を表し、該アルキル基中の任意の水素原子はフッ素原子に置換されてもよく、或いは、-B31-F31-P31で表される基であってもよく(ここで、B31は、-CR-、-CH-CH-、-O-、-S-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-C(=S)-O-、-O-C(=S)-、-O-C(=S)-O-、-CO-NR-、-NR-CO-、-O-CH-、-CH-O-、-S-CH-、-CH-S-または単結合を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し;F31は、炭素数1~12のアルカンジイル基を表し、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる水素原子は、-OR10またはハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、R10は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-または-CO-で置き換わっていてもよく;P31は、水素原子または重合性基を表す)、
 Uは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよく、芳香族炭化水素基は、1つ以上の前記置換基Xによって置換されていてもよい;
 Tは、-O-、-S-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCO-O-、-NU-、-N=CU-、-CO-NU-、-OCO-NU-またはO-NU-を表し、Uは水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基、芳香族炭化水素基(該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよい)を有する炭素数2~30の有機基、または(E31-A31-B31-F31-P31を表し、該アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基および芳香族炭化水素基はそれぞれ、無置換であるかまたは1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基は該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基によって置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-SO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよく、該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-またはO-CO-O-に置き換えられてもよく、E31は前記B31と同様に定義され、A31は、炭素数3~16の2価の脂環式炭化水素基または炭素数6~20の2価の芳香族炭化水素基を表し、該脂環式炭化水素基および該芳香族炭化水素基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子、-R11、-OR12、シアノ基またはニトロ基で置換されていてもよく、R11は、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、R12は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよく、B31、F31およびP31は、それぞれ、前記B31、F31およびP31と同じ意味を有し、qは0~4の整数を表し、E31および/またはA31が複数存在する場合は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、UとUとが結合して環を構成していてもよい〕
から選ばれる基を表す。]
[13]イオン化定数(pKa)が7以上である塩基性化合物の存在下で、式(1)で表される化合物と式(6)で表される化合物とを反応させる、前記[12]に記載の製造方法。
[14]前記[12]または[13]に記載の製造方法により得られる式(7)で表される化合物を含む反応混合組成物と、式(8):
 HOOC-(A-E)n-SP-L    (8)
[式(8)中、A、E、n、SPおよびLは、それぞれ、式(5)中のA、E、n、SPおよびLと同じ意味を表す]
で表される化合物とを混合し、式(7)で表される化合物と式(8)で表される化合物とを反応させて式(2)で表される化合物を生成することを含む、前記[1]に記載の混合組成物の製造方法。
The present invention provides the following preferred embodiments.
[1] A mixed composition comprising a compound represented by the following formula (2) and at least one of the compound represented by the formula (1) and the compound represented by the formula (3), The area percentage value measured by liquid chromatography of the compound represented by (2) is the compound represented by formula (1), the compound represented by formula (2), and the formula (3) contained in the mixed composition. The mixed composition is more than 50% and less than 95% based on the sum of the area values of the compounds represented by.
A-Ar-A (1)
A-Ar-B (2)
B-Ar-B (3)
[A in formula (1) and formula (2) is the following formula (4):
*-D 1 -(A 1 -E 1 )m-SP 1 -L 1 (4)
It is expressed as
B in formula (2) and formula (3) is the following formula (5):
*-D 2 -(A 2 -E 2 )n-SP 2 -L 2 (5)
It is expressed as
In formula (4) and formula (5),
* represents the bonding position with Ar in formula (1), formula (2) or formula (3),
m and n each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, and m and n are different from each other,
D 1 and D 2 each independently represent -C(=O)-O- or -O-C(=O)-,
E 1 and E 2 are each independently a single bond, or -CO-, -O-, -S-, -C(=S)-, -CR 1 R 2 -, -CR 3 =CR 4 - , -NR 5 -, or a combination of two or more thereof, and R 1 to R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. If m is an integer greater than or equal to 2, the plurality of E1 's may be the same or different, and if n is an integer greater than or equal to 2, the plurality of E2 's may be the same or different. may be different,
A 1 and A 2 are each independently a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Represents a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group, when m is an integer of 2 or more, the plurality of A1s may be the same or different, and when n is an integer of 2 or more, Multiple A2s may be the same or different,
SP 1 and SP 2 each independently represent a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms; 20 linear or branched alkynylene groups, or one or more of -CH 2 - constituting the alkylene group, the alkenylene group, and the alkynylene group is -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N (Q) represents a divalent linking group substituted with - or -CO-, Q represents a substituent,
L 1 and L 2 each independently represent a monovalent organic group, at least one of L 1 and L 2 is a polymerizable group,
Ar in formulas (1) to (3) is a group represented by any of the following formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
[In formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6),
* represents a bond with D 1 or D 2 ;
Q 1 represents -S-, -O- or -NR 6 -, R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent,
Q2 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent;
W 1 and W 2 each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 6 -, and R 6 is a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 to 6 which may have a substituent. represents an alkyl group;
Y 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, or an aromatic heterocyclic group,
Y 2 represents a CN group or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom. -CH 2 - may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -O-CO- or -CO-O-;
Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a monovalent carbon atom 6 to 20 aromatic hydrocarbon groups, halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and Z 1 and Z 2 are bonded to each other to form an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocycle. R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
Z 4 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, represents a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
Ax represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ay may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ax and Ay are a bond. may form a ring;
Y 3 and Y 4 each independently represent the following formula (Y 3 -1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
[In formula (Y 3 -1),
R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents X 3 , and the substituent X 3 is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, Bromine atom, iodine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, amino group, hydroxyl group, mercapto group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethyl A silyl group, a thioisocyano group, or one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, - OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -CH=CH-COO-, -CH=CH-OCO- , -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or -C≡C-, a linear or It represents a branched alkyl group, and any hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, or it may be a group represented by -B 31 -F 31 -P 31 (wherein , B 31 is -CR 8 R 9 -, -CH 2 -CH 2 -, -O-, -S-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -C (=S)-O-, -OC(=S)-, -OC(=S)-O-, -CO-NR 8 -, -NR 8 -CO-, -O-CH 2 - , -CH 2 -O-, -S-CH 2 -, -CH 2 -S- or a single bond, and R 8 and R 9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a C 1-4 carbon atom. represents an alkyl group; F 31 represents an alkanediyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkanediyl group may be substituted with -OR 10 or a halogen atom, and R 10 is a carbon Represents an alkyl group of numbers 1 to 4, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and -CH 2 - contained in the alkanediyl group is -O- or -CO- may be substituted with; P 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group),
U 1 represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom, and the aromatic hydrocarbon group is , may be substituted by one or more of the above substituents X3 ;
T 1 is -O-, -S-, -COO-, -OCO-, -OCO-O-, -NU 2 -, -N=CU 2 -, -CO-NU 2 -, -OCO-NU 2 - or O-NU 2 -, and U 2 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. (any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom), or (E 31 -A 31 ) q -B 31 -F 31 - P31 , and each of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, cycloalkenyl group and aromatic hydrocarbon group may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents X3 , and the alkyl group may be substituted by the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in the alkyl group are each independently substituted with -O -, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -SO 2 -, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, - NH-CO-, -CH=CH-COO-, -CH=CH-OCO-, -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or - It may be replaced by C≡C-, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group are each independently -O-, It may be replaced with -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- or O-CO-O-, E 31 is defined in the same manner as B 31 above, and A 31 is a divalent group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms. It represents an alicyclic hydrocarbon group or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and the hydrogen atoms contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group are halogen atoms, -R 11 , -OR 12 , which may be substituted with a cyano group or a nitro group, R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 12 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. represents a group, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and B 31 , F 31 and P 31 have the same meanings as the above B 31 , F 31 and P 31 , respectively. However, q represents an integer from 0 to 4, and when multiple E 31 and/or A 31 exist, they may be the same or different, and U 1 and U 2 combine to form a ring. ]
represents a group selected from ]
[2] The mixed composition according to [1] above, wherein one of m in formula (4) and n in formula (5) is 1 and the other is 2.
[3] The above [1] or [2], wherein A 1 in formula (4) and A 2 in formula (5) each independently represent a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or a 1,4-phenylenediyl group; 2].
[4] The mixed composition according to any one of [1] to [3] above, wherein in formula (4), m is 1 and A 1 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group.
[5] The mixed composition according to any one of [1] to [4] above, wherein in formula (5), n is 1 and A 2 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group.
[6] The mixed composition according to any one of [1] to [5] above, wherein L 1 in formula (4) and L 2 in formula (5) are each an acryloyloxy group.
[7] The above [1], wherein Ar in formulas (1) to (3) is a group represented by any one of formula (Ar-1), formula (Ar-3) and formula (Ar-4). ] to [6]. The mixed composition according to any one of [6].
[8] The mixed composition according to any one of [1] to [7] above, further comprising a photopolymerization initiator.
[9] The mixed composition according to any one of [1] to [8] above, further comprising an organic solvent.
[10] A retardation film comprising a cured product of the mixed composition according to any one of [1] to [9] above.
[11] A circularly polarizing plate comprising the retardation film according to [10] above.
[12] A reaction mixture composition containing a compound represented by formula (7) by reacting a compound represented by formula (1) and a compound represented by formula (6) in the presence of a basic compound The area percentage value measured by liquid chromatography of the compound represented by formula (7) in the reaction mixture is the compound represented by formula (1) contained in the reaction mixture composition, the formula A reaction mixture composition containing the compound represented by formula (7), which is more than 50% and less than 95% based on the sum of the area values of the compound represented by (6) and the compound represented by formula (7). How things are manufactured.
A-Ar-A (1)
HO-Ar-OH (6)
A-Ar-OH (7)
[A in formula (1) and formula (7) is the following formula (4):
*-D 1 -(A 1 -E 1 )m-SP 1 -L 1 (4)
It is expressed as
In formula (4), * represents the bonding position with Ar in formula (1) or formula (7),
m represents an integer of 1 or more,
D 1 represents -C(=O)-O- or -OC(=O)-,
E 1 is a single bond, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -C(=S)-, -CR 1 R 2 -, -CR 3 =CR 4 -, -NR 5 -, or , represents a divalent linking group consisting of a combination of two or more of these, R 1 to R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and m is 2 or more. If it is an integer, multiple E1s may be the same or different,
A 1 is a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. represents a hydrogen group, and when m is an integer of 2 or more, the plurality of A1s may be the same or different,
SP 1 is a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. or one or more of -CH 2 - constituting the alkylene group, the alkenylene group, and the alkynylene group is -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N(Q)-, or represents a divalent linking group substituted with -CO-, Q represents a substituent,
L 1 represents a monovalent organic group,
Ar in formula (1), formula (6) and formula (7) is a group represented by any of the following formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
[In formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6),
* represents a bond with D 1 or D 2 ;
Q 1 represents -S-, -O- or -NR 6 -, R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent,
Q2 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent;
W 1 and W 2 each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 6 -, and R 6 is a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 to 6 which may have a substituent. Represents an alkyl group;
Y 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, or an aromatic heterocyclic group,
Y 2 represents a CN group or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom. -CH 2 - may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -O-CO- or -CO-O-;
Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a monovalent carbon atom 6 to 20 aromatic hydrocarbon groups, halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and Z 1 and Z 2 are bonded to each other to form an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocycle. R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
Z 4 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, represents a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
Ax represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ay may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ax and Ay are a bond. may form a ring;
Y 3 and Y 4 each independently represent the following formula (Y 3 -1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
[In formula (Y 3 -1),
R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents X 3 , and the substituent X 3 is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, Bromine atom, iodine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, amino group, hydroxyl group, mercapto group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethyl A silyl group, a thioisocyano group, or one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, - OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -CH=CH-COO-, -CH=CH-OCO- , -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or -C≡C-, a linear or It represents a branched alkyl group, and any hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, or it may be a group represented by -B 31 -F 31 -P 31 (wherein , B 31 is -CR 8 R 9 -, -CH 2 -CH 2 -, -O-, -S-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -C (=S)-O-, -OC(=S)-, -OC(=S)-O-, -CO-NR 8 -, -NR 8 -CO-, -O-CH 2 - , -CH 2 -O-, -S-CH 2 -, -CH 2 -S- or a single bond, and R 8 and R 9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a C 1-4 carbon atom. represents an alkyl group; F 31 represents an alkanediyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkanediyl group may be substituted with -OR 10 or a halogen atom, and R 10 is a carbon Represents an alkyl group of numbers 1 to 4, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and -CH 2 - contained in the alkanediyl group is -O- or -CO- may be substituted with; P 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group),
U 1 represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom, and the aromatic hydrocarbon group is , may be substituted by one or more of the above substituents X3 ;
T 1 is -O-, -S-, -COO-, -OCO-, -OCO-O-, -NU 2 -, -N=CU 2 -, -CO-NU 2 -, -OCO-NU 2 - or O-NU 2 -, and U 2 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. (any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom), or (E 31 -A 31 ) q -B 31 -F 31 - P31 , and each of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, cycloalkenyl group and aromatic hydrocarbon group may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents X3 , and the alkyl group may be substituted by the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in the alkyl group are each independently substituted with -O -, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -SO 2 -, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, - NH-CO-, -CH=CH-COO-, -CH=CH-OCO-, -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or - It may be replaced by C≡C-, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group are each independently -O-, It may be replaced with -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- or O-CO-O-, E 31 is defined in the same manner as B 31 above, and A 31 is a divalent group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms. It represents an alicyclic hydrocarbon group or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and the hydrogen atoms contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group are halogen atoms, -R 11 , -OR 12 , which may be substituted with a cyano group or a nitro group, R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 12 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. represents a group, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and B 31 , F 31 and P 31 have the same meanings as the above B 31 , F 31 and P 31 , respectively. However, q represents an integer from 0 to 4, and when multiple E 31 and/or A 31 exist, they may be the same or different, and U 1 and U 2 combine to form a ring. ]
represents a group selected from ]
[13] In the above [12], the compound represented by formula (1) and the compound represented by formula (6) are reacted in the presence of a basic compound having an ionization constant (pKa) of 7 or more. Manufacturing method described.
[14] A reaction mixture composition containing a compound represented by formula (7) obtained by the production method described in [12] or [13] above, and formula (8):
HOOC-(A 2 -E 2 )n-SP 2 -L 2 (8)
[In formula (8), A 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 each have the same meaning as A 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 in formula (5)]
and mixing the compound represented by the formula (7) and the compound represented by the formula (8) to produce the compound represented by the formula (2), The method for producing the mixed composition according to [1] above.
 本発明によれば、相転移温度が低く、好ましくは、優れた光学特性を有する位相差フィルムの製造に好適な液晶化合物の混合組成物を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a mixed composition of liquid crystal compounds suitable for producing a retardation film having a low phase transition temperature and preferably excellent optical properties.
 以下、本発明の実施の形態について、詳細に説明する。なお、本発明の範囲はここで説明する実施の形態に限定されるものではなく、本発明の趣旨を損なわない範囲で種々の変更をすることができる。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the scope of the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and various changes can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention.
 <混合組成物>
 本発明の混合組成物は、式(2)で表される化合物(以下、「化合物(2)」ともいう)と、式(1)で表される化合物(以下、「化合物(1)」ともいう)および式(3)で表される化合物(以下、「化合物(3)」ともいう)のうちの少なくとも1つとを含む、液晶化合物の混合組成物である。式(2)中のArで表される基を中心に左右非対称の構造を有する化合物(2)を、式(1)または式(3)中のArを中心に左右対称の構造を有する化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)とともに特定の量的関係で含む本発明の混合組成物は、液晶相への相転移温度が低い。これにより、高温条件下に曝されることなく製膜することが可能となり、得られる光学フィルムへのより一層高い光学特性の付与が期待できる。なお、本明細書においては、式(1)~(3)におけるArの構造が左右非対称であっても、該Arに結合する、式(1)~(3)におけるAまたはBで表される構造がArを中心にして左右で同じ場合には、かかる化合物は左右対称であるものとみなす。
<Mixed composition>
The mixed composition of the present invention comprises a compound represented by formula (2) (hereinafter also referred to as "compound (2)") and a compound represented by formula (1) (hereinafter also referred to as "compound (1)"). ) and at least one of the compound represented by formula (3) (hereinafter also referred to as "compound (3)"). A compound (2) having a bilaterally asymmetrical structure centered around the group represented by Ar in formula (2) is replaced with a compound (2) having a bilaterally symmetrical structure centered around Ar in formula (1) or formula (3) ( The mixed composition of the present invention containing 1) and/or compound (3) in a specific quantitative relationship has a low phase transition temperature to a liquid crystal phase. This makes it possible to form a film without exposing it to high-temperature conditions, and it is expected that the resulting optical film will have even higher optical properties. In addition, in this specification, even if the structure of Ar in formulas (1) to (3) is left-right asymmetric, a compound represented by A or B in formulas (1) to (3) that is bonded to the Ar If the structure is the same on the left and right sides with Ar as the center, such a compound is considered to be bilaterally symmetrical.
 本発明の混合組成物に含まれる化合物(2)は、式(2):
 A-Ar-B   (2)
で表される構造を有する。化合物(2)は、式(2)中のArで表される基を中心に、該Arに結合する2つの側鎖(すなわち、式(2)中のAおよびB)の構造が互いに異なる、左右非対称の構造を有する。より具体的には、式(2)中のAは、式(4):
 *-D-(A-E)m-SP-L   (4)
で表される構造を有し、式(2)中のBは、式(5):
 *-D-(A-E)n-SP-L   (5)
で表される構造を有しており、化合物(2)は、少なくともAおよびBの各側鎖に含まれる環構造の数において左右非対称の構造となる。
Compound (2) contained in the mixed composition of the present invention has the formula (2):
A-Ar-B (2)
It has the structure represented by . Compound (2) has a group represented by Ar in formula (2), and two side chains bonded to the Ar (i.e., A and B in formula (2)) having different structures. It has an asymmetrical structure. More specifically, A in formula (2) represents formula (4):
*-D 1 -(A 1 -E 1 )m-SP 1 -L 1 (4)
It has a structure represented by the following, and B in formula (2) is represented by formula (5):
*-D 2 -(A 2 -E 2 )n-SP 2 -L 2 (5)
Compound (2) has a structure represented by the following, and the compound (2) has an asymmetric structure in terms of the number of ring structures contained in at least each side chain of A and B.
 式(4)および式(5)中、mおよびnは、それぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表す。mおよびnは、それぞれ独立に、好ましくは1~3の整数であり、より好ましくは1または2である。式(4)および式(5)において、mとnとは互いに異なる数である。化合物(2)において、式(2)中のAに含まれる環構造(すなわち、式(4)中のAで表される基)の数と、式(2)中のBに含まれる環構造(すなわち、式(5)中のAで表される基)の数との差が1~3であることが好ましく、1または2であることがより好ましく、1であることがさらに好ましい。本発明の好ましい一実施態様において、mおよびnのいずれか一方は1であり、他方は2または3である。また、より好ましい一実施態様において、mおよびnのいずれか一方は1であり、他方は2である。AおよびBの各側鎖に含まれる環構造の数において左右非対称の構造を有する化合物(2)は、対称性の高い構造を有する化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)との混合組成物において、相転移温度の効果的な低下をもたらし得る。これは、必ずしも限定されるものではないが、左右対称構造の化合物は規則正しく配置することができるため結晶性に優れる傾向にあり、相転移温度が比較的高くなりやすい。このような対称構造の化合物に非対称構造の化合物を加える場合、非対称構造の化合物が化合物の配置しやすさに影響を与え、結晶性を低下させる方向に作用して、相転移温度を低下させ得ると考えられる。一方で、対称構造の化合物に対する比対称構造の化合物の割合が多くなるほど、対称構造の化合物により達成される高い配向秩序性を確保し難くなり、光学特性が低下する傾向にあるため、従来左右非対称の化合物は液晶硬化層を構成する主成分(例えば、液晶硬化膜を構成する(重合性)液晶化合物の総質量に対して50質量%を超える、など)となり難かった。そのメカニズムは明らかではないものの、AおよびBの各側鎖に含まれる環構造の数において左右非対称の構造を有する化合物(2)の割合が高い本発明の混合組成物は、相転移温度の大幅な低下を実現しながら、位相差板等の光学フィルムにとって理想とされる優れた光学特性を確保できる。さらに、本発明の一実施態様において、その効果は、各側鎖において環構造の数は同じであるが左右非対称となる構造(例えば、アルキル鎖の長さ等の違いにより左右非対称となる場合)を有する化合物を配合する場合と比較してより顕著に現れやすい。 In formulas (4) and (5), m and n each independently represent an integer of 1 or more. m and n are each independently preferably an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2. In equations (4) and (5), m and n are different numbers. In compound (2), the number of ring structures contained in A in formula (2) (that is, the group represented by A 1 in formula (4)) and the ring contained in B in formula (2) The difference from the number of structures (that is, the group represented by A 2 in formula (5)) is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 1. . In one preferred embodiment of the invention, one of m and n is 1 and the other is 2 or 3. In a more preferred embodiment, one of m and n is 1 and the other is 2. Compound (2) having a left-right asymmetric structure in the number of ring structures contained in each side chain of A and B is a mixed composition with compound (1) and/or compound (3) having a highly symmetrical structure. can lead to an effective reduction in the phase transition temperature. Although this is not necessarily limited, compounds with a bilaterally symmetrical structure tend to have excellent crystallinity because they can be arranged regularly, and the phase transition temperature tends to be relatively high. When adding a compound with an asymmetric structure to a compound with such a symmetric structure, the compound with an asymmetric structure may affect the ease of arranging the compound, act to reduce crystallinity, and lower the phase transition temperature. it is conceivable that. On the other hand, as the ratio of compounds with a symmetric structure to compounds with a symmetric structure increases, it becomes difficult to secure the high orientational order achieved by compounds with a symmetric structure, and optical properties tend to deteriorate. It was difficult for the compound to become a main component constituting the liquid crystal cured layer (for example, more than 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the (polymerizable) liquid crystal compound constituting the liquid crystal cured film). Although the mechanism is not clear, the mixed composition of the present invention, which has a high proportion of compound (2) having a left-right asymmetric structure in terms of the number of ring structures contained in each side chain of A and B, has a significantly lower phase transition temperature. It is possible to maintain excellent optical properties, which are ideal for optical films such as retardation plates, while achieving a significant reduction in optical properties. Furthermore, in one embodiment of the present invention, the effect is a structure in which the number of ring structures in each side chain is the same but left-right asymmetrical (for example, in the case where left-right asymmetrical occurs due to a difference in the length of the alkyl chain, etc.) It tends to appear more markedly than when compounding with a compound having .
 式(4)および式(5)中、DおよびDは、それぞれ独立に、-C(=O)-O-または-O-C(=O)-を表す。 In formulas (4) and (5), D 1 and D 2 each independently represent -C(=O)-O- or -OC(=O)-.
 式(4)および式(5)中、EおよびEは、それぞれ独立に、単結合、または、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-C(=S)-、-CR-、-CR=CR-、-NR-、若しくは、これらの2以上の組み合わせからなる2価の連結基を表し、R~Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。前記2以上の組み合わせからなる2価の連結基としては、例えば、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-C(=S)O-、-O-CO-O-、-CR-CR-、-O-CR-、-CR-O-CR-、-CO-O-CR-、-O-CO-CR-、-CR-O-CO-CR-、-CR-CO-O-CR-、-NR-CR-、および、-CO-NR-などが挙げられる。EおよびEは、それぞれ独立に、好ましくは単結合、-O-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NR-であり、より好ましくは単結合、-O-、-CO-O-または-O-CO-である。mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるEは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、nが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるEは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。mおよびnがそれぞれ2以上の整数である場合、SPまたはSPに結合するEおよびEは、それぞれ、好ましくは、単結合、または、-O-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-C(=S)O-、-O-CO-O-、*-CR-O-、*-CR-O-CO-若しくは-NR-であり(*はAまたはAとの結合位置を示す)、より好ましくは単結合、-O-、-CO-O-または-O-CO-である。 In formulas (4) and (5), E 1 and E 2 are each independently a single bond, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -C(=S)-, -CR 1 R 2 -, -CR 3 =CR 4 -, -NR 5 -, or a divalent linking group consisting of two or more of these, and R 1 to R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, Represents an atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Examples of the divalent linking group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above include -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -C(=S)O-, -O-CO-O-, -CR 1 R 2 -CR 1 R 2 -, -O-CR 1 R 2 -, -CR 1 R 2 -O-CR 1 R 2 -, -CO-O-CR 1 R 2 -, -O-CO-CR 1 R 2 -, -CR 1 R 2 -O-CO-CR 1 R 2 -, -CR 1 R 2 -CO-O-CR 1 R 2 -, -NR 5 -CR 1 R 2 -, and -CO- Examples include NR 5 -. E 1 and E 2 are each independently preferably a single bond, -O-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NR 5 -, and more Preferably it is a single bond, -O-, -CO-O- or -O-CO-. When m is an integer of 2 or more, the plural E 1 's may be the same or different, and when n is an integer of 2 or more, the plural E 2 's may be the same or different. May be different. When m and n are each an integer of 2 or more, E 1 and E 2 bonded to SP 1 or SP 2 are each preferably a single bond or -O-, -CO-O-, -O -CO-, -C(=S)O-, -O-CO-O-, *-CR 1 R 2 -O-, *-CR 1 R 2 -O-CO- or -NR 5 -; * indicates the bonding position with A 1 or A 2 ), more preferably a single bond, -O-, -CO-O- or -O-CO-.
 式(4)および式(5)中、AおよびAは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の2価の芳香族炭化水素基、または、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の脂環式炭化水素基を表す。前記AおよびAで表される炭素数6以上の2価の芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられ、具体的には下記(a-1)~(a-8)で表される芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
In formulas (4) and (5), A 1 and A 2 each independently represent a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms, which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents an optional alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms. Examples of the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms represented by A 1 and A 2 include aromatic hydrocarbon groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically, the following (a- Examples include aromatic hydrocarbon groups represented by 1) to (a-8).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 前記AおよびAで表される炭素数6以上の2価の脂環式炭化水素基としては、例えば炭素数6~16の脂環式炭化水素基が挙げられ、具体的には下記(a-9)~(a-11)で表される脂環式炭化水素基が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Examples of the divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms represented by A 1 and A 2 include alicyclic hydrocarbon groups having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, and specifically, the following ( Examples include alicyclic hydrocarbon groups represented by a-9) to (a-11).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 前記芳香族炭化水素基および脂環式炭化水素基が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基等の炭素数1~4のアルキル基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基等の炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基;トリフルオロメチル基等の炭素数1~4のフルオロアルキル基;シアノ基;ニトロ基;フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子等のハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。 Examples of substituents that the aromatic hydrocarbon group and alicyclic hydrocarbon group may have include alkyl groups having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, and tert-butyl group. ; Alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as methoxy group and ethoxy group; Fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as trifluoromethyl group; Cyano group; Nitro group; Halogen such as fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, etc. Examples include atoms.
 AおよびAは、置換基を有していない炭素数6~20の2価の芳香族炭化水素基、または、置換基を有していない炭素数6~16の脂環式炭化水素基であることが好ましく、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基または1,4-フェニレン基がより好ましい。mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるAは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、nが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるAは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 A 1 and A 2 are an unsubstituted divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an unsubstituted alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms; is preferable, and a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or a 1,4-phenylene group is more preferable. When m is an integer of 2 or more, the plural A 1 's may be the same or different, and when n is an integer of 2 or more, the plural A 2 's may be the same or different. May be different.
 本発明において、AおよびAが、それぞれ独立に、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基または1,4-フェニレン基であることが好ましい。また、mが1である場合、Aが1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基であることが好ましく、nが1である場合、Aが1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基であることが好ましい。さらに、本発明の一実施態様において、DおよびDに結合するAおよびAが、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基または1,4-フェニレン基であることが好ましく、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基であることがより好ましい。さらに、本発明の好適な一実施態様において、DおよびDに結合するAおよびAが1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基である場合に、該Aおよび/またはAに隣接するEまたはEに結合するAおよび/またはAが1,4-フェニレン基である。 In the present invention, it is preferable that A 1 and A 2 are each independently a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or a 1,4-phenylene group. Further, when m is 1, it is preferable that A 1 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group, and when n is 1, it is preferable that A 2 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group. Furthermore, in one embodiment of the present invention, A 1 and A 2 bonded to D 1 and D 2 are preferably 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or 1,4-phenylene group, and 1,4-cyclohexane More preferably it is a diyl group. Furthermore, in a preferred embodiment of the present invention, when A 1 and A 2 bonded to D 1 and D 2 are 1,4-cyclohexanediyl groups, E adjacent to A 1 and/or A 2 A 1 and/or A 2 bonded to 1 or E 2 are 1,4-phenylene groups.
 式(4)および式(5)中、SPおよびSPは、それぞれ独立に、単結合、炭素数1~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルケニレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキニレン基、または、前記アルキレン基、前記アルケニレン基および前記アルキニレン基を構成する-CH-の1以上が-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(Q)-(Qは置換基である)、若しくは、-CO-に置換された2価の連結基を表す。SPおよびSPで表される炭素数1~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキレン基としては、例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基、メチルヘキシレン基、へプチレン基等が挙げられる。炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルケニレン基としては、例えば、エテニレン基、プロペニレン基、ブテニレン基等が挙げられる。また、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキニレン基としては、例えばエチニレン基等が挙げられる。 In formulas (4) and (5), SP 1 and SP 2 each independently represent a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. or a branched alkenylene group, a linear or branched alkynylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or one or more of -CH 2 - constituting the alkylene group, the alkenylene group, and the alkynylene group is -O- , -S-, -NH-, -N(Q)- (Q is a substituent), or -CO- represents a divalent linking group substituted. Examples of the linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms represented by SP 1 and SP 2 include methylene group, ethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, pentylene group, hexylene group, and methylhexylene group. group, heptylene group, etc. Examples of the linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms include ethenylene group, propenylene group, and butenylene group. Examples of the linear or branched alkynylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms include, for example, an ethynylene group.
 SPおよびSPは、前記アルキレン基、アルケニレン基およびアルキニレン基を構成する-CH-の1つ以上が-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(Q)-、若しくは、-CO-に置換された2価の連結基であってもよい。前記Qで表される置換基としては、AおよびAで表される芳香族炭化水素基または脂環式炭化水素基が有し得る置換基として例示したものと同様の置換基が挙げられる。 SP 1 and SP 2 are such that one or more of -CH 2 - constituting the alkylene group, alkenylene group, and alkynylene group is -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N(Q)-, or - It may also be a divalent linking group substituted with CO-. Examples of the substituent represented by Q include the same substituents as those exemplified as substituents that the aromatic hydrocarbon group or alicyclic hydrocarbon group represented by A 1 and A 2 may have. .
 SPおよびSPは、それぞれ独立に、単結合、炭素数1~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルケニレン基、または、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキニレン基であることが好ましく、単結合、炭素数1~12の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキレン基、炭素数2~12の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルケニレン基、または、炭素数2~12の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキニレン基であることがより好ましく、単結合または炭素数1~12の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキレン基であることがさらに好ましい。 SP 1 and SP 2 are each independently a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a carbon number It is preferably a linear or branched alkynylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms. or a linear or branched alkynylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably a single bond or a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. More preferred.
 式(4)および式(5)中、LおよびLは、それぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、LおよびLの少なくとも一方は重合性基である。前記1価の有機基としては、例えば、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基などを挙げることができる。中でも、LまたはLで表される1価の有機基としては、アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~13のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキル基がさらに好ましい。前記アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状または環状であってもよく、好ましくは直鎖状である。 In formulas (4) and (5), L 1 and L 2 each independently represent a monovalent organic group, and at least one of L 1 and L 2 is a polymerizable group. Examples of the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group. Among these, the monovalent organic group represented by L 1 or L 2 is preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 13 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear.
 LおよびLで表される重合性基としては、化合物(2)を重合させることのできる基であればよく、具体的には、ビニル基、p-スチルベン基、アクリロイル基、メタクロイル基、アクリロイルオキシ基、メタクロイルオキシ基、カルボキシル基、メチルカルボニル基、水酸基、アミド基、炭素数1~4のアルキルアミノ基、アミノ基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アルデヒド基、イソシアネート基、チオイソシアネート基などが例示される。また、かかる重合性基には、上記例示の基とSPまたはSPとを結合するエーテル結合またはエステル結合が含まれていてもよい。LおよびLで表される重合性基としては、例えば、光重合させるのに適したラジカル重合性基またはカチオン重合性基が好ましく、特に取り扱いが容易で、製造も容易であるという点で、アクリロイル基、メタクロイル基、アクリロイルオキシ基またはメタクリロイルオキシ基が好ましく、重合性が高いという点においてアクリロイル基またはアクリロイルオキシ基がより好ましく、アクリロイルオキシ基がさらに好ましい。 The polymerizable groups represented by L 1 and L 2 may be any group that can polymerize compound (2), and specifically include vinyl group, p-stilbene group, acryloyl group, methacryloyl group, Acryloyloxy group, methacroyloxy group, carboxyl group, methylcarbonyl group, hydroxyl group, amide group, alkylamino group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, amino group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, aldehyde group, isocyanate group, thioisocyanate group, etc. is exemplified. Moreover, such a polymerizable group may contain an ether bond or an ester bond that connects the above-exemplified group and SP 1 or SP 2 . The polymerizable groups represented by L 1 and L 2 are preferably radically polymerizable groups or cationic polymerizable groups suitable for photopolymerization, especially in that they are easy to handle and easy to manufacture. , an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, an acryloyloxy group, or a methacryloyloxy group are preferred, an acryloyl group or an acryloyloxy group is more preferred in terms of high polymerizability, and an acryloyloxy group is even more preferred.
 化合物(2)の反応性(重合性)が高くなりやすい観点から、LおよびLがともに重合性基であることが好ましく、LおよびLが、それぞれ、アクリロイル基、メタクロイル基、アクリロイルオキシ基またはメタクリロイルオキシ基であることがより好ましく、LおよびLがともにアクリロイルオキシ基であることがさらに好ましい。 From the viewpoint that the reactivity (polymerizability) of compound (2) is likely to be high, it is preferable that both L 1 and L 2 are polymerizable groups, and L 1 and L 2 are acryloyl group, methacryloyl group, acryloyl group, respectively. It is more preferably an oxy group or a methacryloyloxy group, and even more preferably both L 1 and L 2 are an acryloyloxy group.
 式(4)で表される構造、および、式(5)で表される構造としては、具体的に例えば、下記式(R-1)~(R-138)で表される構造が挙げられる。式中の*は、基Arへの結合位置を表し、nは例えば1~20の整数であってよい。なお、シクロヘキサン環はトランス体であってもシス体であってもよいが、トランス体であることが好ましい。化合物(2)は、基Arを中心として少なくとも環構造の数において非対称構造であるため、例えば、式(4)で表される構造(すなわち、式(2)中のA)として、1つの環構造を有する下記式(R-1)~(R-31)のいずれかで表される構造を有し、式(5)で表される構造(すなわち、式(2)中のB)として、2つの環構造を有する下記式(R-32)~(R-73)のいずれかで表される構造、または、3つの環構造を有する下記式(R-74)~(R-138)のいずれかで表される構造を有し得る。あるいは、例えば、式(4)で表される構造として、2つの環構造を有する下記式(R-32)~(R-73)のいずれかで表される構造を有し、式(5)で表される構造として、3つの環構造を有する下記式(R-74)~(R-138)のいずれかで表される構造を有し得る。 Specific examples of the structure represented by formula (4) and the structure represented by formula (5) include structures represented by the following formulas (R-1) to (R-138). . * in the formula represents the bonding position to the group Ar, and n may be an integer from 1 to 20, for example. Note that the cyclohexane ring may be in the trans or cis form, but is preferably in the trans form. Since compound (2) has an asymmetric structure at least in the number of ring structures around the group Ar, for example, as the structure represented by formula (4) (i.e., A in formula (2)), one ring It has a structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-1) to (R-31) having a structure, and as a structure represented by formula (5) (i.e., B in formula (2)), A structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-32) to (R-73) having two ring structures, or a structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-74) to (R-138) having three ring structures. It can have a structure represented by any of the following. Alternatively, for example, the structure represented by formula (4) has a structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-32) to (R-73) having two ring structures, and the structure represented by formula (5) The structure represented by may have a structure represented by any of the following formulas (R-74) to (R-138) having three ring structures.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 また、上記各構造中の末端部(例えば、式(4)中の-SP-Lに相当する部分)は、下記のいずれかを有する構造であってもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Furthermore, the terminal portion in each of the above structures (for example, the portion corresponding to -SP 1 -L 1 in formula (4)) may have any of the following structures.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 本発明の好ましい一実施態様において、化合物(2)を構成する式(4)中のD、SPおよびLで表される各構造は、それぞれ、式(2)を構成する式(5)中のD、SPおよびLで表される各構造と同じである。すなわち、式(4)で表される構造Aと、式(5)で表される構造Bとは、式(4)中の-(A-E)m-で表される構造と、式(5)中の-(A-E)n-で表される構造とにおいてのみ異なることが好ましい。化合物(2)がかかる構造を有する場合、液晶混合物に含まれる化合物(2)と、化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)との分子構造が互いに類似または近似する構造となり、液晶混合物としての相転移温度が効果的に低下しやすい。また、含まれる化合物の分子構造が互いに類似または近似する液晶混合物では、液晶化合物を配向させる際に互いに与える影響が少なく、高い配向秩序をもって配向しやすいため、得られる液晶硬化膜の光学特性がより向上しやすい。 In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, each structure represented by D 1 , SP 1 and L 1 in formula (4) constituting compound (2) is each represented by formula (5 ) is the same as each structure represented by D 2 , SP 2 and L 2 . That is, structure A represented by formula (4) and structure B represented by formula (5) are the structure represented by -(A 1 -E 1 )m- in formula (4), It is preferable that the structure differs only from the structure represented by -(A 2 -E 2 )n- in formula (5). When compound (2) has such a structure, the molecular structures of compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3) contained in the liquid crystal mixture are similar or similar to each other, and the liquid crystal mixture is The phase transition temperature tends to be effectively lowered. In addition, in a liquid crystal mixture in which the molecular structures of the contained compounds are similar or similar to each other, the liquid crystal compounds have less influence on each other when aligning, and are easily aligned with a high degree of alignment order, so the optical properties of the resulting cured liquid crystal film are improved. Easy to improve.
 式(4)および式(5)中、下記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)のいずれかで表される基である。式(Ar-1)~(Ar-5)で表される基は、式(2)で表される重合性液晶化合物において、長軸方向に対して交差する方向にかさ高い分子構造を与え、短軸方向の吸収波長が長波長となり、通常、配向した液晶分子により発生する位相差が逆波長分散性を有する点において共通する。式(Ar-6)で表される基は、配向した液晶分子により発生する位相差が正波長分散性を有する場合が多い。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
In formula (4) and formula (5), it is a group represented by any of the following formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6). The groups represented by formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-5) give a bulky molecular structure in the direction crossing the long axis direction in the polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by formula (2), They have a common feature in that the absorption wavelength in the short axis direction is a long wavelength, and the retardation generated by oriented liquid crystal molecules usually has reverse wavelength dispersion. In the group represented by formula (Ar-6), the retardation generated by aligned liquid crystal molecules often has positive wavelength dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式(Ar-1)~式(Ar-6)で表される芳香族炭化水素環または芳香族複素環を含む2価の連結基に含まれるπ電子の合計数Nπは、好ましくは12以上、より好ましくは16以上、さらに好ましくは18以上、特に好ましくは20以上である。また、好ましくは36未満、より好ましくは32以下、さらに好ましくは30以下、特に好ましくは26以下である。 The total number N π of π electrons contained in the divalent linking group containing an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocycle represented by formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6) is preferably 12 or more. , more preferably 16 or more, still more preferably 18 or more, particularly preferably 20 or more. Further, it is preferably less than 36, more preferably 32 or less, even more preferably 30 or less, particularly preferably 26 or less.
 式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)中*は、式(4)または式(5)中のDまたはDとの結合部を表す。 In formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6), * represents a bond with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5).
 式(Ar-1)中、Qは-S-、-O-または-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す。式(Ar-3)および(Ar-4)中、Qは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す。 In formula (Ar-1), Q 1 represents -S-, -O- or -NR 6 -, and R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. . In formulas (Ar-3) and (Ar-4), Q 2 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
 式(Ar-2)中、WおよびWは、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す。 In formula (Ar-2), W 1 and W 2 each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 6 -, and R 6 has a hydrogen atom or a substituent. represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 式(Ar-1)中、Yは炭素数1~6のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表す。式(Ar-2)中、YはCN基または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基を表す。ここで、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-、-CO-、-O-CO-または-CO-O-で置換されていてもよい。 In formula (Ar-1), Y 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, or an aromatic heterocyclic group. In formula (Ar-2), Y 2 represents a CN group or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Here, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom, and -CH 2 - contained in the alkyl group is -O-, -CO-, -O-CO- or - May be substituted with CO-O-.
 式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)中、Z、ZおよびZは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表し、ZおよびZは、互いに結合して芳香環または芳香族複素環を形成してもよい。RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す。 In formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6), Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms; 20 alicyclic hydrocarbon group, monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , Z 1 and Z 2 may be combined with each other to form an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocycle. R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 式(Ar-6)中、Zは、炭素数2~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表す。RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す In formula (Ar-6), Z 4 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a monovalent aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. represents a group hydrocarbon group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 . R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
 式(Ar-3)および(Ar-4)中、Axは芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、Ayは水素原子、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基、または芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、AxとAyは結合して環を形成してもよい。 In formulas (Ar-3) and (Ar-4), Ax represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle. , Ay is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a carbon number having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle. It represents 2 to 30 organic groups, and Ax and Ay may be combined to form a ring.
 式(Ar-1)中、Yは、好ましくは置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基であり、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~12の芳香族炭化水素基または炭素数3~12の芳香族複素環基がより好ましい。置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基は、好ましくは置換されていてもよい多環系芳香族炭化水素基または多環系芳香族複素環基である。本明細書において、「多環系芳香族炭化水素基」は、少なくとも2個の芳香環を有する芳香族炭化水素基を意味し、2個以上の芳香環が縮合して形成される縮合芳香族炭化水素基および2個以上の芳香環が結合して形成される芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。「多環系芳香族複素環基」は、少なくとも1個の複素芳香環を有し、芳香環および複素芳香環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1個の環を有する芳香族複素環基を意味し、1個以上の芳香族複素環と芳香環および複素芳香環からなる群から選ばれる1個以上の環とが縮合して形成される芳香族複素環基および少なくとも1個の複素芳香環と芳香環および複素芳香環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1個の環とが結合して形成される芳香族複素環基が挙げられる。 In formula (Ar-1), Y 1 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and has 6 to 6 carbon atoms and may have a substituent. A 12 aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferred. The aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent is preferably an optionally substituted polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group or polycyclic aromatic heterocyclic group. As used herein, "polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group" means an aromatic hydrocarbon group having at least two aromatic rings, and a fused aromatic hydrocarbon group formed by condensing two or more aromatic rings. Examples include aromatic hydrocarbon groups formed by bonding a hydrocarbon group and two or more aromatic rings. "Polycyclic aromatic heterocyclic group" means an aromatic heterocyclic group having at least one heteroaromatic ring and at least one ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring and a heteroaromatic ring. , an aromatic heterocyclic group formed by the condensation of one or more aromatic heterocycles and one or more rings selected from the group consisting of aromatic rings and heteroaromatic rings, and at least one heteroaromatic ring and aromatic Examples include an aromatic heterocyclic group formed by bonding a ring and at least one ring selected from the group consisting of a heteroaromatic ring.
 前記芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基が有し得る置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~6のアルキル基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、ニトロソ基、炭素数1~6のアルキルスルフィニル基、炭素数1~6のアルキルスルホニル基、カルボキシ基、炭素数1~6のフルオロアルキル基、炭素数1~6のアルコキシ基、炭素数1~6のアルキルスルファニル基、炭素数1~4のN-アルキルアミノ基、炭素数2~8のN,N-ジアルキルアミノ基、スルファモイル基、炭素数1~6のN-アルキルスルファモイル基および炭素数2~12のN,N-ジアルキルスルファモイル基が挙げられる。 Examples of substituents that the aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group may have include a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, a nitro group, a nitroso group, and an alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. group, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfanyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, N-alkylamino group, N,N-dialkylamino group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, sulfamoyl group, N-alkylsulfamoyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms and N,N-dialkylsulfa having 2 to 12 carbon atoms A moyl group is mentioned.
 Yとしては、例えば、下記式(Y-1)~(Y-7)で表される基が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Examples of Y 1 include groups represented by the following formulas (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式(Y-1)~式(Y-7)中、*部は連結部を表す。 In formulas (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7), the * part represents a connecting part.
 式(Y-1)~式(Y-7)中、Zは、それぞれ独立に、ハロゲン原子、または炭素数1~20の有機基を表し、例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、メチル基、エチル基、イソプロピル基、sec-ブチル基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、スルホン基、ニトロキシキド基、カルボキシル基、トリフルオロメチル基、メトキシ基、チオメチル基、N,N-ジメチルアミノ基、N-メチルアミノ基が好ましく、ハロゲン原子、メチル基、エチル基、イソプロピル基、sec-ブチル基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基がより好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、イソプロピル基、sec-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基が特に好ましい。 In formulas (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7), Z 5 each independently represents a halogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom , methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, sec-butyl group, cyano group, nitro group, sulfone group, nitroxydo group, carboxyl group, trifluoromethyl group, methoxy group, thiomethyl group, N,N-dimethylamino group, N - Methylamino group is preferred, halogen atom, methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, sec-butyl group, cyano group, nitro group, trifluoromethyl group is more preferred, methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, sec-butyl group A pentyl group and a hexyl group are particularly preferred.
 式(Y-1)~式(Y-7)中、VおよびVは、それぞれ独立に、-CO-、-S-、-NR13-、-O-、-Se-または-SO-を表し、-S-、-NR13-または-O-であることが好ましい。R13は、水素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。 In formulas (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7), V 1 and V 2 are each independently -CO-, -S-, -NR 13 -, -O-, -Se- or - It represents SO 2 -, and is preferably -S-, -NR 13 - or -O-. R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
 式(Y-1)~式(Y-7)中、W~Wは、それぞれ独立に、-C=または-N=を表す。 In formulas (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7), W 3 to W 7 each independently represent -C= or -N=.
 式(Y-1)~式(Y-7)中、V、VおよびW~Wのうち少なくとも1つは、S、NまたはOを含む基を表すことが好ましい。 In formulas (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7), at least one of V 1 , V 2 and W 3 to W 7 preferably represents a group containing S, N or O.
 式(Y-1)~式(Y-7)中、aは、それぞれ独立に、0~3の整数を表し、0または1であることが好ましい。bは、それぞれ独立に、0~2の整数を表し、0であることが好ましい。 In formulas (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7), a each independently represents an integer of 0 to 3, preferably 0 or 1. b each independently represents an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0.
 式(Y-1)~式(Y-7)で表されるいずれかの基は、下記式(Y-8)~式(Y-13)で表されるいずれかの基であることが好ましく、式(Y-8)で表される基であることがより好ましい。なお、*部は連結部を表す。 Any group represented by formula (Y 1 -1) to formula (Y 1 -7) is any group represented by formula (Y 1 -8) to formula (Y 1 -13) below. A group represented by formula (Y 1 -8) is preferable, and a group represented by formula (Y 1 -8) is more preferable. Note that the * part represents a connecting part.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 式(Y-8)~式(Y-13)中、Z、a、b、V、VおよびWは、(Y-1)~式(Y-7)中のZ、a、b、V、VおよびWと同じ意味を表す。 In formulas (Y 1 -8) to (Y 1 -13), Z 5 , a, b, V 1 , V 2 and W 3 are the same as those in (Y 1 -1) to (Y 1 -7) It has the same meaning as Z 5 , a, b, V 1 , V 2 and W 3 .
 Yの具体例としては、例えば、特開2019-003177号公報に記載の式(ar-1)~式(ar-840)で表される基が挙げられる。中でも下記式で表される基が好ましい。 Specific examples of Y 1 include groups represented by formulas (ar-1) to (ar-840) described in JP-A-2019-003177. Among these, groups represented by the following formulas are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 本発明の一実施形態において、式(Ar-1)で表される基として、具体的には、下記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-126)で表される基が挙げられる。式中*部は、式(4)または式(5)中のDまたはDとの連結部を表す。 In one embodiment of the present invention, the group represented by formula (Ar-1) specifically includes groups represented by the following formulas (Ar 1 -1) to (Ar 1 -126). The * part in the formula represents a connecting part with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 本発明の一実施形態において、式(Ar-2)で表される基として、具体的には、下記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-13)で表される基が挙げられる。式中*部は、式(4)または式(5)中のDまたはDとの連結部を表す。 In one embodiment of the present invention, the group represented by formula (Ar-2) specifically includes groups represented by the following formulas (Ar 2 -1) to (Ar 2 -13). The * part in the formula represents a connecting part with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 本発明の一実施形態において、式(Ar-3)で表される基として、具体的には、下記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-23)で表される基が挙げられる。式中*部は、式(4)または式(5)中のDまたはDとの連結部を表す。 In one embodiment of the present invention, the group represented by formula (Ar-3) specifically includes groups represented by the following formulas (Ar 3 -1) to (Ar 3 -23). The * part in the formula represents a connecting part with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 式(Ar-1)~(Ar-4)で表される基は、上記具体的に例示した基の他に、例えば、特開2011-207765号公報、特開2008-107767号公報、WO2014/010325号公報等に記載の基であってもよい。 In addition to the groups specifically exemplified above, the groups represented by formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-4) include, for example, JP-A No. 2011-207765, JP-A No. 2008-107767, WO2014/ The groups described in JP 010325 and the like may also be used.
 式(Ar-5)中、YおよびYは、それぞれ独立して、下記式(Y-1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
で表される基から選択される。
In formula (Ar-5), Y 3 and Y 4 each independently represent the following formula (Y 3 -1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
selected from the groups represented by
 式(Y-1)中、RY1は水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す。該アルキル基は、1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよい。 In formula (Y 3 -1), R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents X3 .
 置換基Xは、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子、ペンタフルオロスルフラニル基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、イソシアノ基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシル基、メルカプト基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ジイソプロピルアミノ基、トリメチルシリル基、ジメチルシリル基、チオイソシアノ基、または、1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-が各々独立して-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖状または分岐状アルキル基を表し、該アルキル基中の任意の水素原子はフッ素原子に置換されてもよく、或いは、-B31-F31-P31で表される基であってもよい。B31は、-CR-、-CH-CH-、-O-、-S-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-C(=S)-O-、-O-C(=S)-、-O-C(=S)-O-、-CO-NR-、-NR-CO-、-O-CH-、-CH-O-、-S-CH-、-CH-S-または単結合を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し;F31は、炭素数1~12のアルカンジイル基を表し、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる水素原子は、-OR10またはハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、R10は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-または-CO-で置き換わっていてもよく;P31は、水素原子または重合性基を表す。 Substituent X 3 is a fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, amino group, hydroxyl group, mercapto group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group , diethylamino group, diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethylsilyl group, thioisocyano group, or one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s each independently -O-, - S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -CH= CH-COO-, -CH=CH-OCO-, -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or -C≡C- represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and any hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, or -B 31 -F 31 -P 31 It may be a group represented by B 31 is -CR 8 R 9 -, -CH 2 -CH 2 -, -O-, -S-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -C( =S) -O-, -OC(=S)-, -OC(=S)-O-, -CO-NR 8 -, -NR 8 -CO-, -O-CH 2 -, -CH 2 -O-, -S-CH 2 -, -CH 2 -S- or a single bond, and R 8 and R 9 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. represents a group; F 31 represents an alkanediyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkanediyl group may be substituted with -OR 10 or a halogen atom, and R 10 represents a carbon number Represents an alkyl group of 1 to 4, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and -CH 2 - contained in the alkanediyl group is -O- or -CO-. It may be substituted; P 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group.
 置換基Xとしては、好ましくはフッ素原子、塩素原子、-CF、-OCFまたはシアノ基である。RY1は、無置換であるか、水素原子または1つ以上のフッ素原子で置換された炭素数1~6のアルキル基が好ましく、より好ましくは水素原子である。 The substituent X 3 is preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, -CF 3 , -OCF 3 or a cyano group. R Y1 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms that is unsubstituted or substituted with a hydrogen atom or one or more fluorine atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 式(Y-1)中、Uは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する炭素数2~30の有機基を表す。該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよく、Uは、芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選択される少なくとも一つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基である。該芳香族炭化水素基は、1つ以上の前記置換基Xによって置換されていてもよい。 In formula (Y 3 -1), U 1 represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having an aromatic hydrocarbon group. Any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a heteroatom, and U 1 has at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle. , is an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms. The aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with one or more of the above substituents X3 .
 Uは、波長分散性が良好になる点から、炭素原子の1つ以上がヘテロ原子に置換されている、芳香族複素環を有する有機基であることが好ましい。Uは、配向した液晶分子による波長分散性が良好で、高い複屈折を示すようになる点から、5員環と6員環との縮合環である芳香族複素環を有する有機基であることがより好ましい。 U 1 is preferably an organic group having an aromatic heterocycle in which one or more carbon atoms are substituted with a hetero atom, from the viewpoint of good wavelength dispersion. U1 is an organic group having an aromatic heterocycle which is a condensed ring of a 5-membered ring and a 6-membered ring, since it has good wavelength dispersion due to aligned liquid crystal molecules and exhibits high birefringence. It is more preferable.
 具体的にUとしては、以下の式で表される基を有するものであることが好ましい。なお、下記式においてこれらの基は任意の位置にTとの結合手を有している。 Specifically, U 1 preferably has a group represented by the following formula. In addition, in the following formula, these groups have a bond with T 1 at an arbitrary position.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 式(Y-1)中、Tは、-O-、-S-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCO-O-、-NU-、-N=CU-、-CO-NU-、-OCO-NU-またはO-NU-を表し、Uは水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基、芳香族炭化水素基(該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよい)を有する炭素数2~30の有機基、または(E31-A31-B31-F31-P31を表す。該アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基および芳香族炭化水素基はそれぞれ、無置換であるかまたは1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基は該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基によって置換されていてもよい。該アルキル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-SO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよく、該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-またはO-CO-O-に置き換えられてもよい。E31は前記B31と同様に定義され、A31は、炭素数3~16の2価の脂環式炭化水素基または炭素数6~20の2価の芳香族炭化水素基を表し、該脂環式炭化水素基および該芳香族炭化水素基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子、-R11、-OR12、シアノ基またはニトロ基で置換されていてもよい。R11は、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、R12は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい。B31、F31およびP31は、それぞれ、前記B31、F31およびP31と同じ意味を有し、qは0~4の整数を表す。E31および/またはA31が複数存在する場合は、それらはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 In formula (Y 3 -1), T 1 is -O-, -S-, -COO-, -OCO-, -OCO-O-, -NU 2 -, -N=CU 2 -, -CO- NU 2 -, -OCO-NU 2 - or O-NU 2 -, where U 2 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms. A cycloalkenyl group, an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms having an aromatic hydrocarbon group (any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom), or (E 31 -A 31 ) q -B 31 -F 31 -P 31 . Each of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, cycloalkenyl group, and aromatic hydrocarbon group may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents X3 , and the alkyl group is the cycloalkyl group. Alternatively, it may be substituted with a cycloalkenyl group. One -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in the alkyl group are each independently -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- , -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -SO 2 -, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -CH=CH-COO-, -CH=CH -OCO-, -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or -C≡C-, and the cycloalkyl group or cyclo One -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in an alkenyl group are each independently -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- or O-CO-O - may be replaced. E 31 is defined in the same manner as B 31 above, and A 31 represents a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms; The hydrogen atoms contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a halogen atom, -R 11 , -OR 12 , a cyano group, or a nitro group. R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R 12 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom. You can leave it there. B 31 , F 31 and P 31 have the same meanings as B 31 , F 31 and P 31 , respectively, and q represents an integer of 0 to 4. When a plurality of E 31 and/or A 31 are present, they may be the same or different.
 Tは、複屈折が良好で合成が容易な点から、-O-、-S-、-N=CU-または-NU-であることが好ましく、配向した液晶分子における波長分散性と複屈折とを向上させやすい点から、-O-、-S-または-NU-であることがより好ましい。 T 1 is preferably -O-, -S-, -N=CU 2 - or -NU 2 - from the viewpoint of good birefringence and easy synthesis, and has a good effect on wavelength dispersion in aligned liquid crystal molecules. From the viewpoint of easily improving birefringence, -O-, -S-, or -NU 2 - is more preferable.
 Uは、1つ以上の前記置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-が各々独立して-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-または-O-CO-O-に置き換えられてもよい、炭素数1~20のアルキル基若しくはアルケニル基、炭素原子数3~12のシクロアルキル基、または炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基、或いは、当該シクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基、またはアリール基によって置換されていてもよい前記アルキル基若しくはアルケニル基であることが好ましい。 U 2 may be substituted by one or more of the above substituents X 3 , and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s each independently represent -O-, An alkyl group or alkenyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, which may be substituted with -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- or -O-CO-O-, or It is preferably a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, or the above-mentioned alkyl group or alkenyl group which may be substituted with the cycloalkyl group, cycloalkenyl group, or aryl group.
 中でもUは、複屈折および溶剤溶解性の点から、水素原子がフッ素原子に置換されてもよく、1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-が各々独立して-O-、-CO-、-COO-または-OCO-に置き換えられてもよい炭素原子数1~20の直鎖状アルキル基であることがより好ましい。 Among them, in U 2 , from the viewpoint of birefringence and solvent solubility, the hydrogen atom may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s are each independently More preferably, it is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may be replaced with -O-, -CO-, -COO- or -OCO-.
 UとUは結合して環を構成していてもよい。その場合、例えば、-NUで表される環状基、または-N=CUで表される環状基が挙げられる。 U 1 and U 2 may be combined to form a ring. In that case, examples include a cyclic group represented by -NU 1 U 2 or a cyclic group represented by -N=CU 1 U 2 .
 原料が入手しやすく、溶解性が良好で高い複屈折率を示す点から、YおよびYはそれぞれ、下記の式(Y3’-1)~式(Y3’-47)から選ばれる基を表すことが特に好ましい。 Y 3 and Y 4 are each selected from the following formulas (Y 3' -1) to (Y 3' -47) in view of easy availability of raw materials, good solubility, and high birefringence. It is particularly preferred to represent a group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
 化合物(2)の配向性が良好になり、工業的に製造しやすく生産性を向上し得る等の観点から、式(Ar-5)で表される基としては、具体的に、以下の基が挙げられる。下記(Ar-1)~(Ar-20)中の*は、式(4)または式(5)中のDまたはDとの結合部を表す。 From the viewpoint of improving the orientation of compound (2) and facilitating industrial production and improving productivity, the group represented by formula (Ar-5) is specifically the following group. can be mentioned. * in (Ar 5 -1) to (Ar 5 -20) below represents a bond with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
 本発明の一実施形態において、式(Ar-6)で表される基として、具体的には、下記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-5)で表される基が挙げられる。式中*部は、式(4)または式(5)中のDまたはDとの連結部を表す。なお、式(Ar-3)中のClは、他のハロゲン原子であってもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
In one embodiment of the present invention, the group represented by formula (Ar-6) specifically includes groups represented by the following formulas (Ar 6 -1) to (Ar 6 -5). The * part in the formula represents a connecting part with D 1 or D 2 in formula (4) or formula (5). Note that Cl in formula (Ar 6 -3) may be another halogen atom.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)の中でも、式(Ar-1)~(Ar-5)のいずれかで表される基が好ましく、式(Ar-1)、式(Ar-3)および式(Ar-4)のいずれかで表される基がより好ましく、式(Ar-1)で表される基がさらに好ましい。 Among formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6), groups represented by any of formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-5) are preferable, and groups represented by formulas (Ar-1) and (Ar-3) are preferable. ) and the group represented by formula (Ar-4) are more preferred, and the group represented by formula (Ar-1) is even more preferred.
 化合物(2)は、通常、重合性液晶化合物であり、化合物(2)を単独で配向、重合させて得られる液晶硬化膜が、いわゆる逆波長分散性を示す重合性液晶化合物であることが好ましい。 Compound (2) is usually a polymerizable liquid crystal compound, and it is preferable that the cured liquid crystal film obtained by aligning and polymerizing compound (2) alone is a polymerizable liquid crystal compound that exhibits so-called reverse wavelength dispersion. .
 本発明の混合組成物は、化合物(2)に加えて、化合物(1)および化合物(3)のうちの少なくとも一方を含む。化合物(1)は、化合物(2)を構成する式(2)中のAで表される構造(すなわち、式(4)で表される構造)をArの両側に有する、Arを中心に左右が対称構造である化合物である。同様に、化合物(3)は、化合物(2)を構成する式(2)中のBで表される構造(すなわち、式(5)で表される構造)をArの両側に有する、Arを中心に左右が対称構造である化合物である。化合物(1)および化合物(3)は、それぞれ、好ましくは重合性化合物である。化合物(1)および化合物(3)は、それぞれ、液晶化合物であっても、非液晶化合物であってもよいが、光学特性の向上の観点から、化合物(2)に加えて含まれる化合物(1)および化合物(3)のうちの少なくともいずれか一方は液晶化合物であることが好ましく、混合組成物に含まれる化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)に相当する化合物すべてが液晶化合物であることがより好ましく、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)に相当する化合物すべてが重合性液晶化合物であることがさらに好ましい。本発明の混合組成物は、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および/または化合物(3)に相当する重合性液晶化合物を、それぞれ複数含んでいてもよい。 The mixed composition of the present invention contains at least one of compound (1) and compound (3) in addition to compound (2). Compound (1) has a structure represented by A in formula (2) constituting compound (2) (i.e., a structure represented by formula (4)) on both sides of Ar, and has left and right structures centered on Ar. is a compound with a symmetric structure. Similarly, compound (3) has the structure represented by B in formula (2) constituting compound (2) (that is, the structure represented by formula (5)) on both sides of Ar. It is a compound that has a symmetrical structure left and right at the center. Compound (1) and compound (3) are each preferably a polymerizable compound. Compound (1) and compound (3) may each be a liquid crystal compound or a non-liquid crystal compound, but from the viewpoint of improving optical properties, compound (1) contained in addition to compound (2) may be used. ) and compound (3) is preferably a liquid crystal compound, and all compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3) contained in the mixed composition are liquid crystal compounds. More preferably, all of the compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3) are polymerizable liquid crystal compounds. The mixed composition of the present invention may contain a plurality of polymerizable liquid crystal compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2) and/or compound (3), respectively.
 本発明の混合組成物において、液体クロマトグラフィーによって測定される化合物(2)の面積百分率値は、混合組成物に含まれる化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)の面積値の合計に基づいて50%を超え95%未満である。ここで、本明細書において、「面積百分率値」とは、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)の全ピーク面積に対する対象化合物のピーク面積の割合を意味する。化合物(2)の面積百分率値が50%を超えると、混合組成物における相転移温度が十分に低下しやすくなり、液晶硬化膜を作製する際に、より低い加工温度で製膜し得る。これにより、高温での加熱による損傷や配向欠陥の発生を抑制することができ、用いる重合性液晶化合物が本来発現し得る光学特性を低下させることなく製膜化することが可能となり、優れた光学特性を有する液晶硬化膜を得ることができる。左右非対称の液晶化合物は、左右対称の液晶化合物と比較して、例えば、得られる液晶硬化膜の波長分散性(特に、逆波長分散性)において不利になり得るが、面積百分率値で50%を超える左右非対称の化合物(2)と、化合物(2)より少ない量の左右対称の化合物(1)および/または(3)とを、上記のような特定のバランスで含むことにより、一般に、より強く逆波長分散性を示す傾向にあるとされる左右対称化合物を単独で配向および重合して得られる液晶硬化膜における光学特性よりも優れた光学特性を付与し得る。このような効果をより一層高めやすい観点から、本発明において、化合物(2)の面積百分率値は、好ましくは55%以上、より好ましくは60%以上、さらに好ましくは65%以上、特に好ましくは70%以上であり、例えば75%以上であってもよい。化合物(2)の面積百分率値の上限は、例えば90%以下であってもよく、85%以下であってもよい。
 なお、本発明の混合組成物において、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および/または化合物(3)に相当する化合物が複数含まれる場合、化合物(2)の面積百分率値は、全化合物(1)、全化合物(2)および全化合物(3)の全ピーク面積に対する全化合物(2)のピーク面積に基づき算出される。面積百分率値は、液体クロマトグラフィーによって測定されるピーク面積に基づき算出することができ、詳細には、後述する実施例に記載の方法により測定、算出できる。
In the mixed composition of the present invention, the area percentage value of compound (2) measured by liquid chromatography is the sum of the area values of compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3) contained in the mixed composition. more than 50% and less than 95% based on Here, in this specification, "area percentage value" means the ratio of the peak area of the target compound to the total peak area of compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3). When the area percentage value of compound (2) exceeds 50%, the phase transition temperature in the mixed composition tends to be sufficiently lowered, and a cured liquid crystal film can be formed at a lower processing temperature. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of damage and orientation defects caused by heating at high temperatures, and it becomes possible to form films without deteriorating the optical properties that can originally be expressed by the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used, resulting in excellent optical properties. A cured liquid crystal film having characteristics can be obtained. Asymmetrical liquid crystal compounds may be disadvantageous compared to symmetrical liquid crystal compounds, for example, in terms of wavelength dispersion (especially reverse wavelength dispersion) of the resulting cured liquid crystal film; In general, by containing a more bilaterally asymmetrical compound (2) and a less bilaterally symmetrical compound (1) and/or (3) than compound (2) in a specific balance as described above, Optical properties superior to those of a cured liquid crystal film obtained by aligning and polymerizing a left-right symmetrical compound alone, which is said to tend to exhibit reverse wavelength dispersion, can be imparted. From the viewpoint of further enhancing such effects, in the present invention, the area percentage value of compound (2) is preferably 55% or more, more preferably 60% or more, still more preferably 65% or more, particularly preferably 70% or more. % or more, and may be, for example, 75% or more. The upper limit of the area percentage value of compound (2) may be, for example, 90% or less, or 85% or less.
In addition, in the mixed composition of the present invention, when a plurality of compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2) and/or compound (3) are included, the area percentage value of compound (2) is ), calculated based on the peak area of all compounds (2) relative to the total peak area of all compounds (2) and all compounds (3). The area percentage value can be calculated based on the peak area measured by liquid chromatography, and in detail, it can be measured and calculated by the method described in the Examples below.
 本発明の混合組成物は、化合物(2)と、化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)とを組み合わせて含み、かつ、化合物(2)の面積百分率値が50%を超えることにより、例えば、化合物(1)や化合物(3)のような対称性の高い構造を有する化合物を単独で用いる場合、および、対称性の高い構造を有する化合物の面積百分率値が50%を超えるような混合組成物の場合と比較して、液晶相への相転移温度を大きく低下し得る。例えば、本発明の混合組成物を構成する化合物(2)と、化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)との混合組成物としての液晶相転移温度(ネマチック相転移温度)は、該液晶混合物から得られる液晶硬化膜が逆波長分散性を示し得る液晶混合物である場合、好ましくは120℃以下、より好ましくは115℃以下であり、例えば110℃以下、さらには105℃以下の場合もあり得る。また、混合組成物の相転移温度(ネマチック相転移温度)は、通常25℃以上、好ましくは40℃以上、より好ましくは50℃以上である。 The mixed composition of the present invention contains compound (2) in combination with compound (1) and/or compound (3), and the area percentage value of compound (2) exceeds 50%, so that, for example, , when a compound having a highly symmetrical structure such as compound (1) or compound (3) is used alone, and a mixed composition in which the area percentage value of the compound having a highly symmetrical structure exceeds 50%. The phase transition temperature to the liquid crystal phase can be significantly lowered compared to the case of solids. For example, the liquid crystal phase transition temperature (nematic phase transition temperature) of the mixed composition of compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3) constituting the mixed composition of the present invention is When the cured liquid crystal film obtained from is a liquid crystal mixture capable of exhibiting reverse wavelength dispersion, the temperature is preferably 120°C or lower, more preferably 115°C or lower, and may be, for example, 110°C or lower, or even 105°C or lower. . Further, the phase transition temperature (nematic phase transition temperature) of the mixed composition is usually 25°C or higher, preferably 40°C or higher, and more preferably 50°C or higher.
 本発明の一実施態様において、本発明の混合組成物は、化合物(1)または化合物(3)単独の場合の相転移温度(ネマチック相転移温度)と比較して、相転移温度を好ましくは5℃以上、より好ましくは10℃以上、さらに好ましくは15℃以上、特に好ましくは20℃以上低下させることができ、例えば30℃以上、さらには35℃以上低下できる場合もあり得る。また、化合物(2)とともに化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)を含むが、化合物(2)の面積百分率値が50%以下である混合組成物と比較して、相転移温度を好ましくは5℃以上、より好ましくは10℃以上低下させることができ、例えば15℃以上、さらには20℃以上低下できる場合もあり得る。 In one embodiment of the present invention, the mixed composition of the present invention preferably has a phase transition temperature of 5% compared to the phase transition temperature (nematic phase transition temperature) of compound (1) or compound (3) alone. The temperature can be lowered by 10°C or more, more preferably 15°C or more, particularly preferably 20°C or more, for example, 30°C or more, and even 35°C or more. In addition, compared to a mixed composition that contains compound (1) and/or compound (3) together with compound (2), but in which the area percentage value of compound (2) is 50% or less, the phase transition temperature is preferably lowered. The temperature can be lowered by 5°C or more, more preferably by 10°C or more, for example by 15°C or more, and even by 20°C or more.
 本発明において、液晶相転移温度は、例えば、温度調節ステージを備えた偏光顕微鏡や、示差走査熱量計(DSC)、熱重量示差熱分析装置(TG-DTA)等を用いて測定することができる。複数の液晶化合物を含む場合、上記相転移温度は混合組成物を構成する化合物(1)~(3)に相当する化合物と前記化合物(1)~(3)に相当する化合物以外の他の全液晶化合物を混合組成物における組成と同じ比率で混合した液晶化合物の混合物を用いて測定される温度を意味する。 In the present invention, the liquid crystal phase transition temperature can be measured using, for example, a polarizing microscope equipped with a temperature control stage, a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC), a thermogravimetric differential thermal analyzer (TG-DTA), etc. . When a plurality of liquid crystal compounds are included, the above phase transition temperature is the same as that of the compounds corresponding to compounds (1) to (3) constituting the mixed composition and all other compounds other than the compounds corresponding to compounds (1) to (3). It means the temperature measured using a mixture of liquid crystal compounds in which the liquid crystal compounds are mixed in the same ratio as the composition in the mixed composition.
 本発明の混合組成物は、化合物(2)の面積百分率値が50%を超え、かつ、本発明の効果が得られる限りにおいて、化合物(1)~(3)以外の液晶化合物(以下、「他の液晶化合物」ともいう)を含んでいてもよい。そのような液晶化合物としては、例えば、液晶便覧(液晶便覧編集委員会編、丸善(株)平成12年10月30日発行)の3章 分子構造と液晶性の、3.2 ノンキラル棒状液晶分子、3.3 キラル棒状液晶分子に記載された化合物、特開2010-31223号公報に記載された化合物、特開2011-207765号公報、特許第5962760号公報等記載されるような、液晶硬化膜にした場合に逆波長分散性を発現し得る重合性液晶化合物や、正波長分散性を発現し得る重合性液晶化合物などが挙げられる。 The mixed composition of the present invention may contain liquid crystal compounds other than compounds (1) to (3) (hereinafter referred to as " (also referred to as "other liquid crystal compounds"). Examples of such liquid crystal compounds include 3.2 Non-chiral rod-like liquid crystal molecules in Chapter 3, Molecular Structure and Liquid Crystal Properties, of the Liquid Crystal Handbook (edited by the Liquid Crystal Handbook Editorial Committee, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd. on October 30, 2000). , 3.3 Compounds described in chiral rod-like liquid crystal molecules, compounds described in JP-A No. 2010-31223, cured liquid crystal films such as those described in JP-A No. 2011-207765, Patent No. 5962760, etc. Examples include a polymerizable liquid crystal compound that can exhibit reverse wavelength dispersion when used as a polymer, a polymerizable liquid crystal compound that can exhibit forward wavelength dispersion, and the like.
 本発明の混合組成物が他の液晶化合物を含む場合、他の液晶化合物の含有量は、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)の合計100質量部に対して、好ましくは15質量部以下、より好ましくは10質量部以下、さらに好ましくは5質量部以下である。特に、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および/または化合物(3)と分子構造の大きく異なる液晶化合物の含有量が多くなり過ぎると、相分離を引き起こしやすくなり、外観を損なったり、高い光学特性を確保し難くなったりするおそれがあるため、本発明の混合組成物を構成する液晶化合物は、化合物(2)と類似する構造を有する液晶化合物から実質的に構成されることが好ましい。
 なお、前記「類似する」とは、例えば、化合物(2)における側鎖A(すなわち、式(4)で表される構造)や側鎖B(すなわち、式(5)で表される構造)、Arで表される部分と共通する構造を有する場合をいう。また、前記「実質的に構成される」とは、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)に相当する化合物の含有量が混合組成物に含まれる化合物(1)~(3)に相当する化合物と他の全液晶化合物の総質量に対して90質量%以上であることをいう。本発明の一態様において、混合組成物は、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および/または化合物(3)に相当する化合物以外の液晶化合物を含まない。
When the mixed composition of the present invention contains other liquid crystal compounds, the content of the other liquid crystal compounds is preferably 15 parts by mass based on a total of 100 parts by mass of compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3). The amount is not more than 10 parts by mass, more preferably not more than 10 parts by mass, even more preferably not more than 5 parts by mass. In particular, if the content of a liquid crystal compound whose molecular structure is significantly different from that of Compound (1), Compound (2) and/or Compound (3) is too high, phase separation is likely to occur, resulting in poor appearance and high optical properties. Therefore, it is preferable that the liquid crystal compound constituting the mixed composition of the present invention is substantially composed of a liquid crystal compound having a structure similar to that of compound (2).
Note that the above-mentioned "similar" refers to, for example, side chain A (i.e., the structure represented by formula (4)) and side chain B (i.e., the structure represented by formula (5)) in compound (2). , Ar has a common structure. In addition, the above-mentioned "substantially constitutes" refers to compounds (1) to (3) in which the content of compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2), and compound (3) is included in the mixed composition. This means that the amount is 90% by mass or more based on the total mass of the compound corresponding to and all other liquid crystal compounds. In one embodiment of the present invention, the mixed composition does not contain any liquid crystal compounds other than compounds corresponding to compound (1), compound (2) and/or compound (3).
 本発明の混合組成物は、化合物(2)並びに化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)のみから構成されていてもよい。化合物(2)並びに化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)を重合させて液晶硬化膜を得る場合の、反応性および取扱性等を向上させる観点から、本発明の混合組成物は、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)に加えて、光重合開始剤、有機溶剤、重合禁止剤、光増感剤、レベリング剤などの成分をさらに含んでいてもよい。 The mixed composition of the present invention may be composed only of compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3). From the viewpoint of improving reactivity, handling properties, etc. when compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3) are polymerized to obtain a cured liquid crystal film, the mixed composition of the present invention contains compound ( In addition to 1), compound (2), and compound (3), the composition may further contain components such as a photopolymerization initiator, an organic solvent, a polymerization inhibitor, a photosensitizer, and a leveling agent.
 本発明の混合組成物が、化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)に加えて、前記のようなさらなる成分を含む場合、本発明の混合組成物中の化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)の総質量は、混合組成物の固形分100質量部に対して、例えば70~99.5質量部であってよく、好ましくは80~99質量部、より好ましくは85~98質量部、さらに好ましくは90~95質量部である。化合物(1)、化合物(2)および化合物(3)の総質量が上記範囲内であれば、得られる液晶硬化膜の配向性の観点から有利である。なお、混合組成物の固形分とは、混合組成物から有機溶剤等の揮発性成分を除いた全ての成分の量を意味する。 When the mixed composition of the present invention contains the above-mentioned further components in addition to Compound (1), Compound (2) and Compound (3), Compound (1), Compound (3) in the mixed composition of the present invention The total mass of (2) and compound (3) may be, for example, 70 to 99.5 parts by mass, preferably 80 to 99 parts by mass, and more preferably It is 85 to 98 parts by weight, more preferably 90 to 95 parts by weight. If the total mass of compound (1), compound (2) and compound (3) is within the above range, it is advantageous from the viewpoint of orientation of the obtained cured liquid crystal film. Note that the solid content of the mixed composition means the amount of all components excluding volatile components such as organic solvents from the mixed composition.
 本発明の混合組成物は重合開始剤を含有していてもよい。重合開始剤は、重合性化合物等の重合反応を開始し得る化合物であり、サーモトロピック液晶の相状態に依存しないという観点から、光の作用により活性ラジカルを発生する光重合開始剤が好ましい。 The mixed composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization initiator. The polymerization initiator is a compound capable of initiating a polymerization reaction such as a polymerizable compound, and from the viewpoint of not depending on the phase state of the thermotropic liquid crystal, a photopolymerization initiator that generates active radicals by the action of light is preferable.
 光重合開始剤は、重合性化合物の重合反応を開始し得る化合物であれば、公知の光重合開始剤を用いることができる。具体的には、光の作用により活性ラジカルまたは酸を発生できる光重合開始剤が挙げられ、中でも、光の作用によりラジカルを発生する光重合開始剤が好ましい。光重合開始剤は単独または2種以上組み合わせて使用できる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, any known photopolymerization initiator can be used as long as it is a compound that can initiate the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound. Specifically, photopolymerization initiators that can generate active radicals or acids by the action of light can be mentioned, and among them, photopolymerization initiators that can generate radicals by the action of light are preferred. The photopolymerization initiators can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 光重合開始剤としては、公知の光重合開始剤を用いることができ、例えば、活性ラジカルを発生する光重合開始剤としては、自己開裂型のベンゾイン系化合物、アセトフェノン系化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン系化合物、α-アミノアセトフェノン系化合物、オキシムエステル系化合物、アシルホスフィンオキサイド系化合物、アゾ系化合物等を使用でき、水素引き抜き型のベンゾフェノン系化合物、アルキルフェノン系化合物、ベンゾインエーテル系化合物、ベンジルケタール系化合物、ジベンゾスベロン系化合物、アントラキノン系化合物、キサントン系化合物、チオキサントン系化合物、ハロゲノアセトフェノン系化合物、ジアルコキシアセトフェノン系化合物、ハロゲノビスイミダゾール系化合物、ハロゲノトリアジン系化合物、トリアジン系化合物等を使用できる。酸を発生する光重合開始剤としては、ヨードニウム塩およびスルホニウム塩等を使用することができる。低温での反応効率に優れるという観点から自己開裂型の光重合開始剤が好ましく、特にアセトフェノン系化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン系化合物、α-アミノアセトフェノン系化合物、オキシムエステル系化合物が好ましい。 As the photopolymerization initiator, a known photopolymerization initiator can be used. For example, as a photopolymerization initiator that generates active radicals, self-cleavable benzoin compounds, acetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, α-Aminoacetophenone compounds, oxime ester compounds, acylphosphine oxide compounds, azo compounds, etc. can be used, and hydrogen abstraction type benzophenone compounds, alkylphenone compounds, benzoin ether compounds, benzyl ketal compounds, dibenzo Suberone-based compounds, anthraquinone-based compounds, xanthone-based compounds, thioxanthone-based compounds, halogenoacetophenone-based compounds, dialkoxyacetophenone-based compounds, halogenobisimidazole-based compounds, halogenotriazine-based compounds, triazine-based compounds, etc. can be used. As the photopolymerization initiator that generates acid, iodonium salts, sulfonium salts, and the like can be used. From the viewpoint of excellent reaction efficiency at low temperatures, self-cleavable photopolymerization initiators are preferred, and acetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, α-aminoacetophenone compounds, and oxime ester compounds are particularly preferred.
 光重合開始剤の含有量は、混合組成物に含まれる重合性化合物の総量100質量部に対して、通常、0.1質量部以上20質量部以下であり、好ましくは1質量部以上15質量部以下であり、より好ましくは1質量部以上10質量部以下である。上記範囲内であれば、重合性基の反応が十分に進行し、かつ、液晶化合物の配向を乱し難い。なお、本明細書において「重合性化合物」とは、少なくとも1つの重合性基を有する化合物を意味する。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator is usually 0.1 parts by mass or more and 20 parts by mass or less, preferably 1 part by mass or more and 15 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total amount of polymerizable compounds contained in the mixed composition. part or less, more preferably 1 part by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less. Within the above range, the reaction of the polymerizable group will proceed sufficiently and the orientation of the liquid crystal compound will not be easily disturbed. In this specification, the term "polymerizable compound" means a compound having at least one polymerizable group.
 本発明において混合組成物は、通常、有機溶剤に溶解した状態で基材等に塗布されるため有機溶剤を含むことが好ましい。有機溶剤としては、化合物(2)、並びに化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)等を溶解し得る溶剤が好ましく、また、これらの化合物の重合反応に不活性な溶剤であることが好ましい。有機溶剤としては、例えば、メタノール、エタノール、エチレングリコール、イソプロピルアルコール、プロピレングリコール、エチレングリコールメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールブチルエーテル、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、2-ブトキシエタノールおよびプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル等のアルコール溶剤;酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、エチレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート、γ-ブチロラクトン、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートおよび乳酸エチル等のエステル溶剤;アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、シクロペンタノン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノンおよびメチルイソブチルケトン等のケトン溶剤;ペンタン、ヘキサンおよびヘプタン等の脂肪族炭化水素溶剤;エチルシクロヘキサン等の脂環式炭化水素溶剤;トルエンおよびキシレン等の芳香族炭化水素溶剤;アセトニトリル等のニトリル溶剤;テトラヒドロフランおよびジメトキシエタン等のエーテル溶剤;クロロホルムおよびクロロベンゼン等の塩素含有溶剤;ジメチルアセトアミド、ジメチルホルミアミド、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン等のアミド系溶剤等が挙げられる。これらの有機溶剤は、単独または2種以上組み合わせて使用できる。これらの中でも、アルコール溶剤、エステル溶剤、ケトン溶剤、塩素含有溶剤、アミド系溶剤および芳香族炭化水素溶剤がより好ましい。 In the present invention, the mixed composition preferably contains an organic solvent because it is usually applied to a substrate etc. in a state dissolved in an organic solvent. The organic solvent is preferably a solvent that can dissolve compound (2), compound (1) and/or compound (3), etc., and is preferably a solvent that is inert to the polymerization reaction of these compounds. Examples of organic solvents include alcohol solvents such as methanol, ethanol, ethylene glycol, isopropyl alcohol, propylene glycol, ethylene glycol methyl ether, ethylene glycol butyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-butoxyethanol, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether. ; Ester solvents such as ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethylene glycol methyl ether acetate, γ-butyrolactone, propylene glycol methyl ether acetate and ethyl lactate; Ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone and methyl isobutyl ketone Solvents; aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents such as pentane, hexane and heptane; alicyclic hydrocarbon solvents such as ethylcyclohexane; aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene and xylene; nitrile solvents such as acetonitrile; ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dimethoxyethane Solvents: Chlorine-containing solvents such as chloroform and chlorobenzene; Amide solvents such as dimethylacetamide, dimethylformamide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP), 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, etc. . These organic solvents can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among these, alcohol solvents, ester solvents, ketone solvents, chlorine-containing solvents, amide solvents and aromatic hydrocarbon solvents are more preferred.
 混合組成物中の有機溶剤の含有量は、混合組成物100質量部に対して、好ましくは50~98質量部、より好ましくは50~95質量部である。従って、混合組成物100質量部に占める固形分は、2~50質量部が好ましく、5~50質量部がより好ましい。固形分が50質量部以下であると、混合組成物の粘度が低くなることから、塗布時の膜の厚みが略均一になり、ムラが生じ難くなる傾向がある。上記固形分は、製造しようとする硬化膜の厚みを考慮して適宜定めることができる。 The content of the organic solvent in the mixed composition is preferably 50 to 98 parts by weight, more preferably 50 to 95 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the mixed composition. Therefore, the solid content in 100 parts by mass of the mixed composition is preferably 2 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass. When the solid content is 50 parts by mass or less, the viscosity of the mixed composition becomes low, so that the thickness of the film upon application becomes approximately uniform, and unevenness tends to occur less easily. The above-mentioned solid content can be appropriately determined in consideration of the thickness of the cured film to be produced.
 重合反応を安定的に進行させる観点から、混合組成物は重合禁止剤を含有してもよい。重合禁止剤により、重合性化合物の重合反応の進行度合いをコントロールすることができる。 From the viewpoint of stably proceeding the polymerization reaction, the mixed composition may contain a polymerization inhibitor. The degree of progress of the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound can be controlled by the polymerization inhibitor.
 前記重合禁止剤としては、例えばハイドロキノン、アルコキシ基含有ハイドロキノン、アルコキシ基含有カテコール(例えば、ブチルカテコール等)、ピロガロール、2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-1-ピペリジニルオキシラジカル等のラジカル捕捉剤;チオフェノール類;β-ナフチルアミン類およびβ-ナフトール類等が挙げられる。 Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include radicals such as hydroquinone, alkoxy group-containing hydroquinone, alkoxy group-containing catechol (such as butylcatechol), pyrogallol, and 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy radical. Scavengers; thiophenols; β-naphthylamines, β-naphthols, and the like.
 重合性化合物の総量100質量部に対して、通常0.01~10質量部であり、好ましくは0.1~5質量部であり、さらに好ましくは0.1~3質量部である。重合禁止剤の含有量が、上記範囲内であると、重合性液晶化合物の配向を乱すことなく重合を行うことができる。 The amount is usually 0.01 to 10 parts by weight, preferably 0.1 to 5 parts by weight, and more preferably 0.1 to 3 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the total amount of polymerizable compounds. When the content of the polymerization inhibitor is within the above range, polymerization can be carried out without disturbing the orientation of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound.
 混合組成物は増感剤を含有してもよい。増感剤としては、光増感剤が好ましい。該増感剤としては、例えば、キサントンおよびチオキサントン等のキサントン化合物(例えば、2,4-ジエチルチオキサントン、2-イソプロピルチオキサントン等);アントラセンおよびアルコキシ基含有アントラセン(例えば、ジブトキシアントラセン等)等のアントラセン化合物;フェノチアジンおよびルブレン等が挙げられる。 The mixed composition may contain a sensitizer. As the sensitizer, a photosensitizer is preferred. Examples of the sensitizer include xanthone compounds such as xanthone and thioxanthone (for example, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone, 2-isopropylthioxanthone, etc.); anthracene such as anthracene and anthracene containing an alkoxy group (for example, dibutoxyanthracene, etc.); Compounds include phenothiazine and rubrene.
 混合組成物が増感剤を含有する場合、混合組成物に含有される重合性化合物の重合反応をより促進することができる。光増感剤の含有量は、重合性化合物の総量100質量部に対して、通常0.01~10質量部であり、好ましくは0.05~5質量部であり、さらに好ましくは0.1~3質量部である。 When the mixed composition contains a sensitizer, the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound contained in the mixed composition can be further promoted. The content of the photosensitizer is usually 0.01 to 10 parts by mass, preferably 0.05 to 5 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.1 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total amount of polymerizable compounds. ~3 parts by mass.
 混合組成物は、レベリング剤を含んでいてもよい。レベリング剤とは、組成物の流動性を調整し、組成物を塗布して得られる膜をより平坦にする機能を有する添加剤であり、例えば、有機変性シリコーンオイル系、ポリアクリレート系およびパーフルオロアルキル系のレベリング剤が挙げられる。中でも、ポリアクリレート系レベリング剤およびパーフルオロアルキル系レベリング剤が好ましい。 The mixed composition may contain a leveling agent. A leveling agent is an additive that has the function of adjusting the fluidity of the composition and making the film obtained by applying the composition more flat, and examples include organically modified silicone oil, polyacrylate, and perfluorinated silicone oil. Examples include alkyl leveling agents. Among these, polyacrylate leveling agents and perfluoroalkyl leveling agents are preferred.
 混合組成物におけるレベリング剤の含有量は、重合性化合物の総量100質量部に対して、0.01~5質量部が好ましく、0.05~3質量部がさらに好ましい。レベリング剤の含有量が上記範囲内であると、化合物(2)等を水平配向させることが容易になり、かつ、得られる硬化膜がより平滑となる傾向がある。重合性化合物に対するレベリング剤の含有量が上記範囲を超えると、得られる硬化膜にムラが生じやすい傾向がある。なお、混合組成物は、レベリング剤を2種以上含有していてもよい。 The content of the leveling agent in the mixed composition is preferably 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, more preferably 0.05 to 3 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the total amount of polymerizable compounds. When the content of the leveling agent is within the above range, it becomes easier to horizontally align the compound (2) and the like, and the resulting cured film tends to be smoother. When the content of the leveling agent relative to the polymerizable compound exceeds the above range, the resulting cured film tends to be uneven. Note that the mixed composition may contain two or more types of leveling agents.
 <混合組成物の製造方法>
 本発明の混合組成物は、化合物(2)、並びに、化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)に、必要に応じて、溶剤、光重合開始剤、重合禁止剤、光増感剤またはレベリング剤などの添加剤を加えて、所定温度で撹拌混合すること等により調製できる。
<Method for producing mixed composition>
The mixed composition of the present invention contains compound (2), compound (1) and/or compound (3), and optionally a solvent, a photoinitiator, a polymerization inhibitor, a photosensitizer or a leveling agent. It can be prepared by adding additives such as agents and stirring and mixing at a predetermined temperature.
 本発明の混合組成物を構成する化合物(1)~化合物(3)は、それぞれ、Methoden der Organischen Chemie、Organic Reactions、OrganicSyntheses、Comprehensive Organic Synthesis、新実験化学講座等に記載されている公知の有機合成反応(例えば、縮合反応、エステル化反応、ウイリアムソン反応、ウルマン反応、ウイッティヒ反応、シッフ塩基生成反応、ベンジル化反応、薗頭反応、鈴木-宮浦反応、根岸反応、熊田反応、檜山反応、ブッフバルト-ハートウィッグ反応、フリーデルクラフト反応、ヘック反応、アルドール反応等)を、その構造に応じて、適宜組み合わせることにより、製造することができる。具体的には、例えば、特開2010-31223号等に記載の重合性液晶化合物の製造方法に従い、所望する化合物(1)、化合物(2)または化合物(3)の構造に対応する構造を有するアルコール化合物とカルボン酸化合物とのエステル化反応により、それぞれ別個に調製することができる。 Compounds (1) to (3) constituting the mixed composition of the present invention are manufactured by Methoden der Organischen Chemie, Organic Reactions, Organic Syntheses, Comprehensive Organic, respectively. Known organic synthesis described in Synthesis, New Experimental Chemistry Course, etc. Reactions (e.g. condensation reaction, esterification reaction, Williamson reaction, Ullmann reaction, Wittig reaction, Schiff base formation reaction, benzylation reaction, Sonogashira reaction, Suzuki-Miyaura reaction, Negishi reaction, Kumada reaction, Hiyama reaction, Buchwald reaction) Hartwig reaction, Friedel-Crafts reaction, Heck reaction, aldol reaction, etc.) can be produced by appropriately combining them depending on the structure. Specifically, for example, according to the method for producing a polymerizable liquid crystal compound described in JP-A No. 2010-31223, etc., a compound having a structure corresponding to the structure of the desired compound (1), compound (2), or compound (3) is used. They can be prepared separately by esterification reaction between an alcohol compound and a carboxylic acid compound.
 50%を超える面積百分率値で化合物(2)を含む本発明の混合組成物は、前述したような方法により別個に調製された化合物(2)と、化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)とを、化合物(2)の面積百分率値が50%を超える所望の比率で混合することによっても調製し得る。しかしながら、Arを中心に左右非対称構造を有する化合物(2)の面積百分率値が50%を超える本発明の混合組成物は、例えば、化合物(1)と式(6):
 HO-Ar-OH   (6)
[式(6)中のArは、上記式(1)中のArと同じ意味を表す]
で表される化合物(以下、「化合物(6)」ともいう)とを、塩基性化合物の存在下で反応させて、式(7):
 A-Ar-OH   (7)
[式(7)中のAおよびArは、それぞれ、上記式(1)中のAおよびArと同じ意味を表す]
で表される化合物(以下、「化合物(7)」ともいう)を含む反応混合組成物を得る工程を含む方法により、前記反応混合組成物を中間材料として調製し得る。別個に調製した化合物(2)と、化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)とを混合する方法で調製する場合、化合物(2)を一旦取り出す必要があり、例えば、下記のような従来の製造方法により化合物(2)を生成する場合、理論上50%未満の量でしか得られないため、ここから化合物(2)を取り出す場合にはより一層煩雑な精製工程が必要となる。本発明における前記方法であれば、かかる非常に煩雑な精製工程等を経る必要がないため、より効率よく、所望の混合組成物を製造できる。また、化合物(6)のような化合物(2)のコア部(式(2)中のArに相当する構造)を構成し得るアルコール化合物と、化合物(2)の側鎖部(メソゲン部)となる構造を有する、互いに異なる構造の2種以上のカルボン酸化合物とをエステル化反応により結合させて調製する場合には、理論上、化合物(2)の面積百分率値が50%を超える混合組成物は得られないが、化合物(1)と化合物(6)とから、化合物(7)を含む反応混合組成物を得る工程を含む前記方法であれば、50%を超える高い割合で化合物(2)を含む混合調製物を、簡便に、かつ、より効率よく調製しやすい。
Mixed compositions of the invention comprising compound (2) in an area percentage value of greater than 50% are compound (2) prepared separately by a method as described above, and compound (1) and/or compound (3). It can also be prepared by mixing the compound (2) in a desired ratio such that the area percentage value exceeds 50%. However, the mixed composition of the present invention in which the area percentage value of compound (2) having a left-right asymmetric structure centering on Ar exceeds 50% is, for example, compound (1) and formula (6):
HO-Ar-OH (6)
[Ar in formula (6) has the same meaning as Ar in formula (1) above]
A compound represented by formula (7) (hereinafter also referred to as "compound (6)") is reacted in the presence of a basic compound:
A-Ar-OH (7)
[A and Ar in formula (7) each represent the same meaning as A and Ar in formula (1) above]
The reaction mixture composition can be prepared as an intermediate material by a method including a step of obtaining a reaction mixture composition containing the compound represented by (hereinafter also referred to as "compound (7)"). When compound (2) prepared separately is mixed with compound (1) and/or compound (3), it is necessary to take out compound (2). When compound (2) is produced by the production method, it can be obtained in an amount that is less than 50% of the theoretical amount, so when compound (2) is extracted from it, a more complicated purification step is required. According to the method of the present invention, there is no need to go through such extremely complicated purification steps, so that a desired mixed composition can be produced more efficiently. In addition, an alcohol compound that can constitute the core part (structure corresponding to Ar in formula (2)) of compound (2) such as compound (6), and a side chain part (mesogen part) of compound (2) When prepared by combining two or more carboxylic acid compounds with different structures by esterification reaction, a mixed composition in which the area percentage value of compound (2) theoretically exceeds 50%. However, if the method includes the step of obtaining a reaction mixture composition containing compound (7) from compound (1) and compound (6), compound (2) will be obtained at a high rate of over 50%. It is easy to easily and more efficiently prepare a mixed preparation containing the following.
 本発明は、式(1)で表される化合物と式(6)で表される化合物とを、塩基性化合物の存在下で反応させて、式(7)で表される化合物を含む反応混合組成物を得る工程(以下、「工程(i)」ともいう)を含み、前記反応混合物における式(7)で表される化合物の液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した面積百分率値が、反応混合組成物に含まれる式(1)で表される化合物、式(6)で表される化合物および式(7)で表される化合物の面積値の合計に基づいて50%を超え95%未満である、式(7)で表される化合物を含む反応混合組成物の製造方法、を対象とする。
 A-Ar-A     (1)
 HO-Ar-OH   (6)
 A-Ar-OH    (7)
 式(1)、式(6)および式(7)中のAおよびArは、それぞれ、上記式(1)中のAおよびArと同じ意味を表し、最終的に所望する化合物(2)の構造に応じて決定される。
The present invention provides a reaction mixture containing a compound represented by formula (7) by reacting a compound represented by formula (1) and a compound represented by formula (6) in the presence of a basic compound. The area percentage value measured by liquid chromatography of the compound represented by formula (7) in the reaction mixture includes the step of obtaining a composition (hereinafter also referred to as "step (i)"). The formula is more than 50% and less than 95% based on the total area value of the compound represented by formula (1), the compound represented by formula (6), and the compound represented by formula (7) included. The present invention is directed to a method for producing a reaction mixture composition containing the compound represented by (7).
A-Ar-A (1)
HO-Ar-OH (6)
A-Ar-OH (7)
A and Ar in formula (1), formula (6), and formula (7) respectively represent the same meanings as A and Ar in the above formula (1), and ultimately form the desired structure of compound (2). Determined accordingly.
 化合物(1)は、その構造に応じて公知の有機合成反応を適宜組み合わせて合成、結合することにより製造し得る。具体的には、例えば、特開2010-31223号等に記載の方法に従い、所望する化合物(1)の構造に対応する構造を有する化合物から調製できる。 Compound (1) can be produced by appropriately combining and bonding known organic synthesis reactions depending on its structure. Specifically, it can be prepared from a compound having a structure corresponding to the structure of the desired compound (1), for example, according to the method described in JP-A No. 2010-31223 and the like.
 アルコール化合物である化合物(6)としては、所望する化合物(7)における基Arに対応するArに対して2つのヒドロキシ基が結合した化合物であればよい。化合物(6)としては、例えば、前記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)の具体例として例示した各基Arにおいて2つの*部がヒドロキシル基である化合物が挙げられる。 The compound (6) which is an alcohol compound may be a compound in which two hydroxy groups are bonded to Ar corresponding to the group Ar in the desired compound (7). Examples of the compound (6) include compounds in which two * moieties in each group Ar exemplified as specific examples of the formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6) above are hydroxyl groups.
 工程(1)において、化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応は、塩基性化合物の存在下で行われる。必ずしも以下の反応に限定されるものではないが、塩基性化合物の存在下において、化合物(6)のArに結合する一方のヒドロキシ基(-OH)の水素が引き抜かれることにより遷移状態となり、1分子のOH-Ar-Oが、1分子の化合物(1)に求核攻撃し、該化合物(1)のArに結合する一方の側鎖A〔すなわち、*-D-(A-E)m-SP-L〕の(-OCO-または-COO-である)Dとの関係において求核置換反応を生じることにより、2分子の化合物(7)が生成されるものと推定される。 In step (1), the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) is carried out in the presence of a basic compound. Although not necessarily limited to the following reaction, in the presence of a basic compound, the hydrogen of one of the hydroxy groups (-OH) bonded to Ar of compound (6) is extracted, resulting in a transition state. The molecule OH-Ar-O - makes a nucleophilic attack on one molecule of compound (1), and one side chain A [i.e., *-D 1 -(A 1 - E 1 ) m-SP 1 -L 1 ] that generates two molecules of compound (7) by causing a nucleophilic substitution reaction in the relationship with D 1 (-OCO- or -COO-) It is estimated to be.
 前記反応により、左右対称である1分子の化合物(1)から2分子の化合物(7)が得られる。化合物(7)は、化合物(2)を製造するための中間体として好適であり、化合物(7)を含む反応混合組成物に、化合物(1)における側鎖Aとは異なる構造の側鎖Bに対応する構造を有する後述の式(8)で表される化合物を反応させることにより、50%を超えるような高い面積百分率値で左右非対称構造を有する化合物(2)を含む本発明の混合組成物を、簡便に、かつ、効率よく製造できる。 Through the above reaction, two molecules of compound (7) are obtained from one molecule of compound (1) which is bilaterally symmetrical. Compound (7) is suitable as an intermediate for producing compound (2), and a side chain B having a structure different from side chain A in compound (1) is added to the reaction mixture composition containing compound (7). By reacting a compound represented by the below-mentioned formula (8) having a structure corresponding to the above, the mixture composition of the present invention containing the compound (2) having a left-right asymmetric structure with a high area percentage value exceeding 50% You can easily and efficiently manufacture things.
 工程(i)において、塩基性化合物としては、化合物(6)のArに結合する一方のヒドロキシ基から水素を引き抜き、化合物(1)と化合物(6)とにおける上記求核置換反応を開始・進行し得るものであれば、公知の塩基性化合物から適宜選択して採用し得る。塩基性化合物は無機塩基性化合物であっても、有機塩基性化合物であってもよく、1種のみを使用しても、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応をより効率よく進めることができ、化合物(7)を高い割合で含む反応混合組成物を得やすい観点から、工程(i)における塩基性化合物としては、イオン化定数(pKa)が7以上である塩基性化合物が好ましい。 In step (i), the basic compound extracts hydrogen from one of the hydroxy groups bonded to Ar of compound (6) to initiate and proceed the nucleophilic substitution reaction between compound (1) and compound (6). If possible, it may be appropriately selected from known basic compounds. The basic compound may be an inorganic basic compound or an organic basic compound, and may be used alone or in combination of two or more. From the viewpoint that the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) can proceed more efficiently and it is easier to obtain a reaction mixture composition containing a high proportion of compound (7), the basic compound in step (i) is , a basic compound having an ionization constant (pKa) of 7 or more is preferred.
 イオン化定数(pKa)は酸解離定数とも呼ばれ、酸から水素イオンが放出される解離反応における平衡定数Kaを負の常用対数で表したものである。塩基のイオン化定数は、その塩基の共役酸のイオン化定数(酸解離定数)である。なお、本明細書において、塩基性化合物のイオン化定数は、pH特性溶解度法によって求められる。 The ionization constant (pKa) is also called the acid dissociation constant, and is the equilibrium constant Ka in a dissociation reaction in which hydrogen ions are released from an acid, expressed as a negative common logarithm. The ionization constant of a base is the ionization constant (acid dissociation constant) of the conjugate acid of the base. In addition, in this specification, the ionization constant of a basic compound is calculated|required by the pH characteristic solubility method.
 工程(i)において用いる塩基性化合物は、pKaが好ましくは7.5以上、より好ましくは8以上、さらに好ましくは9以上であり、その上限は特に限定されるものではないが、通常17以下であり、好ましくは15以下、より好ましくは13.5以下である。塩基性化合物のpKaが上記範囲内であると、化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応が効率よく進行しやすく、化合物(7)を高い割合で含む反応混合組成物が得られやすい。 The basic compound used in step (i) preferably has a pKa of 7.5 or more, more preferably 8 or more, and even more preferably 9 or more, and the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is usually 17 or less. Yes, preferably 15 or less, more preferably 13.5 or less. When the pKa of the basic compound is within the above range, the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) tends to proceed efficiently, and a reaction mixture composition containing a high proportion of compound (7) is easily obtained.
 工程(i)において用いる塩基性化合物としては、具体的に例えば、N,N-ジメチルアミノピリジン(pKa:9.7)、ジアザビシクロウンデセン(pKa:13.5)、トリエタノールアミン(pKa:10.75)、N-メチルモルホリン(pKa:7.38)、1,4-ジアザビシクロ[2.2.2]オクタン(pKa:8.7)、N,N-ジイソプロピルエチルアミン(pKa:10.98)、カリウムtert-ブトキシド(pKa:17)等が挙げられる。中でも、N,N-ジメチルアミノピリジン、ジアザビシクロウンデセン、トリエタノールアミンが好ましく、N,N-ジメチルアミノピリジン、ジアザビシクロウンデセンがより好ましい。 Specific examples of the basic compound used in step (i) include N,N-dimethylaminopyridine (pKa: 9.7), diazabicycloundecene (pKa: 13.5), and triethanolamine (pKa: 13.5). : 10.75), N-methylmorpholine (pKa: 7.38), 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (pKa: 8.7), N,N-diisopropylethylamine (pKa: 10. 98), potassium tert-butoxide (pKa: 17), and the like. Among them, N,N-dimethylaminopyridine, diazabicycloundecene, and triethanolamine are preferred, and N,N-dimethylaminopyridine and diazabicycloundecene are more preferred.
 工程(i)において用いる塩基性化合物の量は、用いる塩基性化合物の種類、所望する反応混合組成物における化合物(7)の割合等に応じて適宜決定すればよい。例えば、化合物(6)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.01モル以上、より好ましくは0.05モル以上、さらに好ましくは0.1モル以上であり、また、好ましくは10モル以下、より好ましくは5モル以下、さらに好ましくは3モル以下、特に好ましくは1モル以下である。塩基性化合物の量が上記範囲内であると、化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応が効率よく進行しやすく、化合物(7)を高い割合で含む反応混合組成物が得られやすい。なお、塩基性化合物を複数種含む場合、pKaが7以上である塩基性化合物の合計含有量が上記範囲内にあることが好ましい。 The amount of the basic compound used in step (i) may be appropriately determined depending on the type of basic compound used, the desired proportion of compound (7) in the reaction mixture composition, etc. For example, the amount is preferably 0.01 mol or more, more preferably 0.05 mol or more, even more preferably 0.1 mol or more, and preferably 10 mol or less, more preferably 1 mol or more of compound (6). is 5 mol or less, more preferably 3 mol or less, particularly preferably 1 mol or less. When the amount of the basic compound is within the above range, the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) tends to proceed efficiently, and a reaction mixture composition containing a high proportion of compound (7) is easily obtained. In addition, when a plurality of types of basic compounds are included, it is preferable that the total content of basic compounds having a pKa of 7 or more is within the above range.
 工程(i)において、化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応は、好ましくは溶剤の存在下で行う。溶剤としては、本発明の混合組成物に含まれ得るものとして例示した有機溶剤と同様のものが挙げられる。それらの溶剤は、単独または2種以上組合せて使用できる。また、本発明の混合組成物を構成する有機溶剤と同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。工程(i)で用いる溶剤としては、化合物(1)や化合物(6)、生成される化合物(7)の溶解性等の観点から、テトラヒドロフランなどのエーテル溶剤、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)などのアミド系溶剤、シクロペンタノンなどのケトン溶剤等が好ましい。 In step (i), the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent. Examples of the solvent include the same organic solvents as exemplified as those that can be included in the mixed composition of the present invention. These solvents can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, the organic solvent may be the same as or different from the organic solvent constituting the mixed composition of the present invention. As the solvent used in step (i), from the viewpoint of solubility of compound (1), compound (6), and compound (7) to be produced, ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP), etc. ), amide solvents such as cyclopentanone, ketone solvents such as cyclopentanone, etc. are preferred.
 前記溶剤の使用量は特に限定されないが、各化合物が十分に溶解して反応が効率よく進行し得るよう、通常、化合物(1)および化合物(6)の合計1質量部に対して1質量部以上、好ましくは1.2質量部以上であり、過剰な溶剤の使用を避けるため、通常50質量部以下、好ましくは30質量部以下、より好ましくは20質量部以下である。 The amount of the solvent used is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 part by mass per 1 part by mass of compound (1) and compound (6) in order to sufficiently dissolve each compound and allow the reaction to proceed efficiently. As mentioned above, the amount is preferably 1.2 parts by mass or more, and in order to avoid using an excessive amount of solvent, it is usually 50 parts by mass or less, preferably 30 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or less.
 化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応には、必要に応じて添加剤を用いてもよい。例えば重合を防止するために重合禁止剤の存在下で行ってもよい。重合禁止剤としては、例えば、2,6-ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール(BHT)、2,2’-メチレンビス(6-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール)、亜リン酸トリフェニル、亜リン酸トリス(ノニルフェニル)、フェノチアジン等が挙げられる。重合禁止剤を用いる場合、その添加量は、化合物(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.01モル以上、さらに好ましくは0.05モル以上であり、また、好ましくは1.0モル当量以下である。 Additives may be used in the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) as necessary. For example, it may be carried out in the presence of a polymerization inhibitor to prevent polymerization. Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include 2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-cresol (BHT), 2,2'-methylenebis(6-tert-butyl-p-cresol), triphenyl phosphite, and Examples include tris(nonylphenyl) phosphate, phenothiazine, and the like. When using a polymerization inhibitor, the amount added is preferably 0.01 mol or more, more preferably 0.05 mol or more, and preferably 1.0 mol equivalent per 1 mol of compound (1). It is as follows.
 化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応は、化合物(1)、化合物(6)および塩基性化合物、必要に応じて溶剤、添加剤等を混合した状態で行うことができる。 The reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) can be carried out in a state in which compound (1), compound (6), a basic compound, and, if necessary, a solvent, additives, etc. are mixed.
 前記反応における条件は、用いる各化合物の種類や反応規模等に応じて適宜決定し得る。
 本発明の製造方法の一実施態様において、化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応温度は、好ましくは0℃~80℃、より好ましくは20℃~60℃である。反応温度が前記範囲内であると、化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応が進みやすく、穏やかな条件であるためより安全に目的の化合物を得やすい。
Conditions for the reaction can be appropriately determined depending on the type of each compound used, the scale of the reaction, and the like.
In one embodiment of the production method of the present invention, the reaction temperature between compound (1) and compound (6) is preferably 0°C to 80°C, more preferably 20°C to 60°C. When the reaction temperature is within the above range, the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) tends to proceed, and the mild conditions make it easier to obtain the target compound more safely.
 反応時間は、使用する化合物の種類、配合比率および反応温度等に応じて決定すればよい。反応規模等にもよるが、好ましくは10分~48時間であり、より好ましくは10分~24時間である。本発明において、化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応時間は、化合物(1)と化合物(6)および塩基性化合物が併存し始めた時点を始点とし、化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応が停止/終了した時点を終点とする。反応の進行度合いは、高速液体クロマトグラフィー、薄層クロマトグラフィー、ガスクロマトグラフィー等の分析手段により確認できる。 The reaction time may be determined depending on the type of compound used, blending ratio, reaction temperature, etc. Depending on the reaction scale, etc., the time is preferably 10 minutes to 48 hours, more preferably 10 minutes to 24 hours. In the present invention, the reaction time between compound (1) and compound (6) starts from the time when compound (1), compound (6), and the basic compound begin to coexist; ) The end point is the point at which the reaction with the reaction mixture stops/completes. The degree of progress of the reaction can be confirmed by analytical means such as high performance liquid chromatography, thin layer chromatography, and gas chromatography.
 得られた化合物の構造は、NMRスペクトル、IRスペクトル、マススペクトル等の測定、元素分析等により、同定することができる。 The structure of the obtained compound can be identified by measurements such as NMR spectrum, IR spectrum, mass spectrum, elemental analysis, etc.
 工程(i)で得られる化合物(7)を含む反応混合組成物における化合物(7)の液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した面積百分率値は、反応混合組成物に含まれる化合物(1)、化合物(6)および化合物(7)の面積値の合計に基づいて50%を超え95%未満であることが好ましい。反応混合組成物に化合物(7)が面積百分率値において50%を超える量で含まれていると、該反応混合組成物を中間材料として、面積百分率値で50%を超える化合物(2)を含む本発明の混合組成物を得ることができる。工程(i)における化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応の進行を制御して、得られる反応混合組成物中の化合物(7)の量に加えて、化合物(1)と化合物(6)の量を調整しておくことにより、後述する工程(ii)を経て、高い割合の化合物(2)ととともに、必要量の化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)を含む本発明の混合組成物を得ることができる。反応混合組成物に含まれる化合物(7)の量は、最終的に所望する化合物(2)を含む本発明の混合組成物における化合物(2)の配合割合に応じて適宜決定することができ、例えば55%以上、60%以上、65%以上、または70%以上であってもよく、例えば90%以下、または85%以下であってもよい。例えば、化合物(2)の面積百分率値が75%である混合組成物の中間体として使用し得る反応混合組成物においては、化合物(7)の含有量が、面積百分率値で75%以上であることが好ましい。このような割合で化合物(7)を含む反応混合組成物は、相転移温度の低い本発明の混合組成物を得るための中間材料として好適である。なお、面積百分率値は、本発明の混合組成物において先に説明したのと同様に、液体クロマトグラフィーによって測定されるピーク面積に基づき算出することができる。 The area percentage value measured by liquid chromatography of compound (7) in the reaction mixture composition containing compound (7) obtained in step (i) is the area percentage value of compound (1) and compound (6) contained in the reaction mixture composition. It is preferably more than 50% and less than 95% based on the total area value of compound (7). When the reaction mixture composition contains compound (7) in an amount exceeding 50% in terms of area percentage, the reaction mixture composition, as an intermediate material, contains compound (2) in an amount exceeding 50% in terms of area percentage. A mixed composition of the invention can be obtained. The progress of the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) in step (i) is controlled to increase the amount of compound (1) and compound (6) in addition to the amount of compound (7) in the resulting reaction mixture composition. ), the mixture of the present invention containing a high proportion of compound (2) and the required amount of compound (1) and/or compound (3) can be prepared through step (ii) described below. A composition can be obtained. The amount of compound (7) contained in the reaction mixture composition can be appropriately determined depending on the blending ratio of compound (2) in the mixture composition of the present invention finally containing the desired compound (2), For example, it may be 55% or more, 60% or more, 65% or more, or 70% or more, and may be, for example, 90% or less, or 85% or less. For example, in a reaction mixture composition that can be used as an intermediate for a mixed composition in which the area percentage value of compound (2) is 75%, the content of compound (7) is 75% or more in area percentage value. It is preferable. A reaction mixture composition containing compound (7) in such a proportion is suitable as an intermediate material for obtaining the mixture composition of the present invention having a low phase transition temperature. Note that the area percentage value can be calculated based on the peak area measured by liquid chromatography in the same manner as described above for the mixed composition of the present invention.
 工程(i)により得られる化合物(7)を含む反応混合組成物と、式(8):
 HOOC-(A-E)n-SP-L    (8)
で表される化合物(以下、「化合物(8)」ともいう)とを混合し、化合物(7)と化合物(8)とを反応させること(以下、該工程を「工程(ii)」ともいう)により、化合物(2)を含む本発明の混合組成物を製造できる。工程(i)と工程(ii)とは連続して行っても、例えば、工程(i)で得られる反応混合物を一旦保管等した後、工程(i)とは非連続的に工程(ii)を行ってもよい(バッチ式)。工程(i)と工程(ii)とを連続的に行う場合、例えば、精製や取り出し操作を実施する必要がないため、製造効率や作業性の観点で好ましい。また、工程(i)と工程(ii)とを非連続的に行う場合、例えば、工程(i)で生成する不純物について、工程(ii)への持ち込み量を低減させることができるため、高純度の製品取得が可能である観点で好ましい。
A reaction mixture composition containing compound (7) obtained by step (i) and formula (8):
HOOC-(A 2 -E 2 )n-SP 2 -L 2 (8)
(hereinafter also referred to as "compound (8)") and reacting compound (7) with compound (8) (hereinafter, this step is also referred to as "step (ii)"). ) can produce the mixed composition of the present invention containing compound (2). Even if step (i) and step (ii) are carried out continuously, for example, after the reaction mixture obtained in step (i) is once stored, step (i) is discontinuously carried out and step (ii) is carried out. (batch method). When step (i) and step (ii) are performed continuously, for example, there is no need to perform purification or extraction operations, which is preferable from the viewpoint of production efficiency and workability. In addition, when performing step (i) and step (ii) discontinuously, for example, the amount of impurities generated in step (i) carried into step (ii) can be reduced, resulting in high purity. This is preferable from the viewpoint that it is possible to obtain the following products.
 式(8)中のA、E、n、SPおよびLは、それぞれ、上記式(5)中のA、E、n、SPおよびLと同じ意味を表し、最終的に所望する化合物(2)の構造に応じて決定される。 A 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 in formula (8) have the same meanings as A 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 in formula (5) above, respectively, and the final is determined depending on the desired structure of compound (2).
 化合物(8)は、その構造に応じて公知の有機合成反応を適宜組み合わせて合成、結合することにより製造し得る。具体的には、例えば、特開2010-31223号等に記載の方法に従い、所望する化合物(8)の構造に対応する構造を有する化合物から調製できる。 Compound (8) can be produced by appropriately combining and bonding known organic synthesis reactions depending on its structure. Specifically, it can be prepared from a compound having a structure corresponding to the structure of the desired compound (8), for example, according to the method described in JP-A No. 2010-31223 and the like.
 反応混合物中の化合物(7)と化合物(8)との反応はエステル化反応であり、好ましくは縮合剤の存在下において行われる。縮合剤の存在下でエステル化反応を行うことにより、エステル化反応を効率よく迅速に行うことができる。 The reaction between compound (7) and compound (8) in the reaction mixture is an esterification reaction, and is preferably carried out in the presence of a condensing agent. By performing the esterification reaction in the presence of a condensing agent, the esterification reaction can be performed efficiently and quickly.
 工程(ii)において用いる縮合剤としては、例えば、1-シクロヘキシル-3-(2-モルホリノエチル)カルボジイミドメト-パラ-トルエンスルホネート、ジシクロヘキシルカルボジイミド、ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、1-エチル-3-(3-ジメチルアミノプロピル)カルボジイミド、1-エチル-3-(3-ジメチルアミノプロピル)カルボジイミド塩酸塩(水溶性カルボジイミド:WSCとして市販)、ビス(2、6-ジイソプロピルフェニル)カルボジイミドおよび、ビス(トリメチルシリル)カルボジイミド等のカルボジイミド化合物、2-メチル-6-ニトロ安息香酸無水物、2,2’-カルボニルビス-1H-イミダゾール、1,1’-オキサリルジイミダゾール、ジフェニルホスフォリルアジド、1-(4-ニトロベンゼンスルフォニル)-1H-1、2、4-トリアゾール、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-イルオキシトリピロリジノホスホニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-イルオキシトリス(ジメチルアミノ)ホスホニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート、N,N,N’,N’-テトラメチル-O-(N-スクシンイミジル)ウロニウムテトラフルオロボレート、N-(1,2,2,2-テトラクロロエトキシカルボニルオキシ)スクシンイミド、N-カルボベンゾキシスクシンイミド、O-(6-クロロベンゾトリアゾール-1-イル)-N,N,N’,N’-テトラメチルウロニウムテトラフルオロボレート、O-(6-クロロベンゾトリアゾール-1-イル)-N,N,N’,N’-テトラメチルウロニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート、2-ブロモ-1-エチルピリジニウムテトラフルオロボレート、2-クロロ-1,3-ジメチルイミダゾリニウムクロリド、2-クロロ-1,3-ジメチルイミダゾリニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート、2-クロロ-1-メチルピリジニウムアイオダイド、2-クロロ-1-メチルピリジニウム パラ-トルエンスルホネート、2-フルオロ-1-メチルピリジニウム パラ-トルエンスルホネートおよびトリクロロ酢酸ペンタクロロフェニルエステル等が挙げられる。反応性、コストおよび使用し得る溶媒の観点等から、縮合剤としてはジシクロヘキシルカルボジイミド、1-エチル-3-(3-ジメチルアミノプロピル)カルボジイミド、1-エチル-3-(3-ジメチルアミノプロピル)カルボジイミド塩酸塩、ビス(2、6-ジイソプロピルフェニル)カルボジイミド、ビス(トリメチルシリル)カルボジイミド、ビスイソプロピルカルボジイミド、2,2’-カルボニルビス-1H-イミダゾールが好ましい。 Examples of the condensing agent used in step (ii) include 1-cyclohexyl-3-(2-morpholinoethyl)carbodiimidemeth-para-toluenesulfonate, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylamino Carbodiimides such as propyl)carbodiimide, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (commercially available as water-soluble carbodiimide: WSC), bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)carbodiimide, and bis(trimethylsilyl)carbodiimide Compound, 2-methyl-6-nitrobenzoic anhydride, 2,2'-carbonylbis-1H-imidazole, 1,1'-oxalyldiimidazole, diphenylphosphoryl azide, 1-(4-nitrobenzenesulfonyl)- 1H-1,2,4-triazole, 1H-benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate, 1H-benzotriazol-1-yloxytris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate, N,N, N',N'-tetramethyl-O-(N-succinimidyl)uronium tetrafluoroborate, N-(1,2,2,2-tetrachloroethoxycarbonyloxy)succinimide, N-carbobenzoxysuccinimide, O- (6-chlorobenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate, O-(6-chlorobenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N' , N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate, 2-bromo-1-ethylpyridinium tetrafluoroborate, 2-chloro-1,3-dimethylimidazolinium chloride, 2-chloro-1,3-dimethylimidazolinium Examples include hexafluorophosphate, 2-chloro-1-methylpyridinium iodide, 2-chloro-1-methylpyridinium para-toluenesulfonate, 2-fluoro-1-methylpyridinium para-toluenesulfonate, and trichloroacetic acid pentachlorophenyl ester. . From the viewpoint of reactivity, cost, usable solvent, etc., dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide, and 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide are used as condensing agents. Preferred are hydrochloride, bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)carbodiimide, bis(trimethylsilyl)carbodiimide, bisisopropylcarbodiimide, and 2,2'-carbonylbis-1H-imidazole.
 化合物(7)と化合物(8)とのエステル化反応における縮合剤の使用量は、化合物(7)や化合物(8)の種類、縮合剤の種類等に応じて適宜決定し得る。例えば、化合物(7)1モルに対して通常1.0~1.5モルである。 The amount of the condensing agent used in the esterification reaction between compound (7) and compound (8) can be appropriately determined depending on the types of compound (7) and compound (8), the type of condensing agent, etc. For example, the amount is usually 1.0 to 1.5 mol per 1 mol of compound (7).
 また、前記エステル化反応は、触媒の存在下で行ってもよい。触媒としては、N,N-ジメチルアミノピリジン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、ジメチルアンモニウムペンタフルオロベンゼンスルホナート等が挙げられる。触媒の使用量は、例えば、化合物(7)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.01~0.5モルである。 Additionally, the esterification reaction may be performed in the presence of a catalyst. Examples of the catalyst include N,N-dimethylaminopyridine, N,N-dimethylaniline, dimethylammonium pentafluorobenzenesulfonate, and the like. The amount of the catalyst used is, for example, preferably 0.01 to 0.5 mol per 1 mol of compound (7).
 工程(ii)における化合物(7)と化合物(8)とのエステル化反応は、通常、溶剤中で行われる。溶剤としては、工程(i)における化合物(1)と化合物(6)との反応に用い得るものとして例示したものと同様の溶剤が挙げられる。工程(ii)において使用する溶剤は、工程(i)と同じであっても、異なっていてもよい。反応収率や生産性の観点から、ペンタン、ヘキサン、ヘプタン、トルエン、キシレン、ベンゼン、クロロベンゼン、クロロホルム、ジクロロメタン等の非極性有機溶剤が好ましい。これらの溶剤は、単独で用いてもよいし、複数を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 The esterification reaction between compound (7) and compound (8) in step (ii) is usually carried out in a solvent. Examples of the solvent include the same solvents as those exemplified as those that can be used in the reaction between compound (1) and compound (6) in step (i). The solvent used in step (ii) may be the same as or different from step (i). From the viewpoint of reaction yield and productivity, nonpolar organic solvents such as pentane, hexane, heptane, toluene, xylene, benzene, chlorobenzene, chloroform, and dichloromethane are preferred. These solvents may be used alone or in combination.
 化合物(8)の使用量は、所望する量の化合物(2)を収率よく得やすい観点からは、化合物(7)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.5~2.5モル、より好ましくは0.75~2.0モルであり、さらに好ましくは1.0~1.3モルである。 The amount of compound (8) to be used is preferably 0.5 to 2.5 mol, more preferably 0.5 to 2.5 mol, per 1 mol of compound (7), from the viewpoint of easily obtaining the desired amount of compound (2) in good yield. is 0.75 to 2.0 mol, more preferably 1.0 to 1.3 mol.
 溶剤の使用量は、特に限定されるものではないが、化合物(7)と化合物(8)との合計1質量部に対して、好ましくは1~100質量部であり、より好ましくは5~70質量部であり、さらに好ましくは10~50質量部である。 The amount of the solvent used is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 100 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 70 parts by mass, based on 1 part by mass of compound (7) and compound (8). Parts by weight, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by weight.
 工程(ii)におけるエステル化反応の温度は、反応収率や生産性の観点から、好ましくは-20~120℃であり、より好ましくは-20~60℃であり、さらに好ましくは-10~20℃である。また、エステル化反応の時間は、反応収率や生産性の観点から、好ましくは1分~72時間であり、より好ましくは1~48時間であり、さらに好ましくは1~24時間である。本発明において、化合物(7)と化合物(8)との反応時間は、化合物(7)と化合物(8)とが併存し始めた時点を始点とし、化合物(7)と化合物(8)との反応が停止/終了した時点を終点とする。反応の進行度合いは、高速液体クロマトグラフィー、薄層クロマトグラフィー、ガスクロマトグラフィー等の分析手段により確認できる。 The temperature of the esterification reaction in step (ii) is preferably -20 to 120°C, more preferably -20 to 60°C, still more preferably -10 to 20°C, from the viewpoint of reaction yield and productivity. It is ℃. Further, from the viewpoint of reaction yield and productivity, the esterification reaction time is preferably 1 minute to 72 hours, more preferably 1 to 48 hours, and still more preferably 1 to 24 hours. In the present invention, the reaction time between compound (7) and compound (8) is determined from the time when compound (7) and compound (8) begin to coexist. The end point is when the reaction has stopped/completed. The degree of progress of the reaction can be confirmed by analytical means such as high performance liquid chromatography, thin layer chromatography, and gas chromatography.
 得られた化合物の構造は、NMRスペクトル、IRスペクトル、マススペクトル等の測定、元素分析等により、同定することができる。反応終了後、必要に応じて、例えば、濾過、中和、抽出、水洗等の後処理、蒸留や結晶化等の単離処理等の有機合成化学において採用し得る処理、操作を施すことにより、液晶化合物の混合物として、化合物(2)を含む本発明の混合組成物を得ることができる。このようにして得られる混合組成物に、先に記載したような有機溶剤、光重合開始剤等の必要な成分を加えたものを、位相差フィルム形成用の混合組成物として用いることができる。 The structure of the obtained compound can be identified by measurements such as NMR spectrum, IR spectrum, mass spectrum, elemental analysis, etc. After the reaction is completed, as necessary, for example, by performing treatments and operations that can be adopted in organic synthetic chemistry, such as post-treatments such as filtration, neutralization, extraction, and water washing, and isolation treatments such as distillation and crystallization. The mixed composition of the present invention containing compound (2) can be obtained as a mixture of liquid crystal compounds. A mixed composition obtained in this way, to which necessary components such as an organic solvent and a photopolymerization initiator as described above are added, can be used as a mixed composition for forming a retardation film.
 <位相差フィルム>
 本発明の混合組成物は、相転移温度が低いため、本発明の混合組成物を用いることにより、液晶化合物が本来発現し得る光学特性を低下させることなく低温下で製膜化することが可能となり、優れた光学特性を有する液晶硬化膜が得られやすい。したがって、本発明は、本発明の混合組成物の硬化物であって、該混合組成物中の液晶化合物が配向した状態で硬化してなる液晶硬化膜を含む位相差フィルムにも関する。前記混合組成物の硬化物から構成される位相差フィルムは、用いる液晶化合物が本来発揮し得る光学特性を十分に発現することができ、高い光学性能を有する位相差フィルムとなり得る。
<Retardation film>
Since the mixed composition of the present invention has a low phase transition temperature, by using the mixed composition of the present invention, it is possible to form a film at low temperatures without reducing the optical properties that a liquid crystal compound can originally exhibit. Therefore, it is easy to obtain a cured liquid crystal film having excellent optical properties. Therefore, the present invention also relates to a retardation film that is a cured product of the mixed composition of the present invention and includes a cured liquid crystal film formed by curing the liquid crystal compound in the mixed composition in an oriented state. A retardation film composed of a cured product of the mixed composition can sufficiently exhibit the optical properties that the liquid crystal compound used can originally exhibit, and can be a retardation film having high optical performance.
 本発明の位相差フィルムを構成する液晶硬化膜は、配向状態の化合物(2)のホモポリマーと、化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)のホモポリマーとから構成されていてもよく、また、化合物(2)並びに化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)の混合物の配向状態における共重合体から構成されていてもよい。重合反応が容易であり、均一な液晶硬化膜を得やすいため、本発明の位相差フィルムを構成する液晶硬化膜は、化合物(2)並びに化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)の混合物の配向状態における共重合体から構成されていることが好ましい。 The cured liquid crystal film constituting the retardation film of the present invention may be composed of a homopolymer of compound (2) in an oriented state and a homopolymer of compound (1) and/or compound (3), or , compound (2), and a copolymer of a mixture of compound (1) and/or compound (3) in an oriented state. Since the polymerization reaction is easy and it is easy to obtain a uniform liquid crystal cured film, the liquid crystal cured film constituting the retardation film of the present invention can be prepared using compound (2) and a mixture of compound (1) and/or compound (3). Preferably, it is composed of a copolymer in an oriented state.
 本発明の一態様において、本発明の位相差フィルムは、本発明の混合組成物の硬化物であり、下記式(a)、(b)および(c)で表される光学特性を満たすことが好ましい。このような液晶硬化膜は、通常、化合物(2)並びに化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)が該液晶硬化膜平面に対して水平方向に配向した状態で硬化してなる硬化物(以下、「水平配向液晶硬化膜」ともいう)である。
 Re(450)/Re(550)≦1.00  (a)
 1.00≦Re(650)/Re(550)  (b)
 100nm≦Re(550)≦180nm   (c)
〔式中、Re(λ)は液晶硬化膜の波長λnmにおける面内位相差値を表し、Re=(nx(λ)-ny(λ))×dである(dは液晶硬化膜の厚みを表し、nxは、液晶硬化膜が形成する屈折率楕円体において、液晶硬化膜の平面に平行な方向の波長λnmにおける主屈折率を表し、nyは、液晶硬化膜が形成する屈折率楕円体において、液晶硬化膜の平面に対して平行であり、且つ、前記nxの方向に対して直交する方向の波長λnmにおける屈折率を表す)。〕
In one aspect of the present invention, the retardation film of the present invention is a cured product of the mixed composition of the present invention, and satisfies the optical properties represented by the following formulas (a), (b), and (c). preferable. Such a cured liquid crystal film is usually a cured product (hereinafter referred to as a cured product) obtained by curing compound (2) and compound (1) and/or compound (3) in a state in which they are oriented horizontally with respect to the plane of the cured liquid crystal film. (also referred to as "horizontal alignment liquid crystal cured film").
Re(450)/Re(550)≦1.00 (a)
1.00≦Re(650)/Re(550) (b)
100nm≦Re(550)≦180nm (c)
[In the formula, Re (λ) represents the in-plane retardation value of the liquid crystal cured film at the wavelength λ nm, and Re = (nx (λ) - ny (λ)) × d (d is the thickness of the liquid crystal cured film. In the refractive index ellipsoid formed by the liquid crystal cured film, nx represents the principal refractive index at a wavelength λ nm in a direction parallel to the plane of the liquid crystal cured film, and ny represents the refractive index ellipsoid formed by the liquid crystal cured film. , represents the refractive index at a wavelength λnm in a direction parallel to the plane of the cured liquid crystal film and perpendicular to the direction of nx). ]
 水平配向液晶硬化膜が式(a)および(b)を満たす場合、当該水平配向液晶硬化膜は、短波長での面内位相差値が長波長での面内位相差値よりも小さくなる、いわゆる逆波長分散性を示す。逆波長分散性が向上し、位相差フィルムの光学特性がより向上することから、Re(450)/Re(550)は、好ましくは0.70以上、より好ましくは0.72以上、さらに好ましくは0.75以上であり、また、好ましくは0.90以下、より好ましくは0.87以下、さらに好ましくは0.85以下、特に好ましくは0.83以下である。また、Re(650)/Re(550)は、好ましくは1.00以上、より好ましくは1.01以上であり、さらに好ましくは1.02以上である。 When the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film satisfies formulas (a) and (b), the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film has an in-plane retardation value at a short wavelength that is smaller than an in-plane retardation value at a long wavelength. It exhibits so-called reverse wavelength dispersion. Re(450)/Re(550) is preferably 0.70 or more, more preferably 0.72 or more, and even more preferably It is 0.75 or more, and preferably 0.90 or less, more preferably 0.87 or less, even more preferably 0.85 or less, particularly preferably 0.83 or less. Moreover, Re(650)/Re(550) is preferably 1.00 or more, more preferably 1.01 or more, and even more preferably 1.02 or more.
 上記面内位相差値は、水平配向液晶硬化膜の厚みdによって調整することができる。面内位相差値は、上記式Re(λ)=(nx(λ)-ny(λ))×dによって決定されることから、所望の面内位相差値(Re(λ):波長λ(nm)における水平配向液晶硬化膜の面内位相差値)を得るには、3次元屈折率と膜厚dとを調整すればよい。 The above in-plane retardation value can be adjusted by the thickness d of the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film. Since the in-plane retardation value is determined by the above formula Re(λ)=(nx(λ)-ny(λ))×d, the desired in-plane retardation value (Re(λ): wavelength λ( In order to obtain the in-plane retardation value of the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film in nm), the three-dimensional refractive index and film thickness d may be adjusted.
 また、水平配向液晶硬化膜が式(3)を満たす場合、該水平配向液晶硬化膜を含む位相差フィルムはλ/4板として機能し、該液晶硬化膜を含む位相差フィルムを備える楕円偏光板を光学ディスプレイ等に適用した場合の正面反射色相の向上効果(着色を抑制させる効果)に優れる。面内位相差値のより好ましい範囲は120nm≦Re(550)≦170nmであり、さらに好ましい範囲は130nm≦Re(550)≦150nmである。 Further, when the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film satisfies formula (3), the retardation film including the horizontally aligned liquid crystal cured film functions as a λ/4 plate, and the elliptically polarizing plate includes the retardation film including the liquid crystal cured film. It has an excellent effect of improving the hue of frontal reflection (effect of suppressing coloring) when applied to optical displays and the like. A more preferable range of the in-plane retardation value is 120 nm≦Re(550)≦170 nm, and an even more preferable range is 130 nm≦Re(550)≦150 nm.
 本発明の位相差フィルムは、例えば、
 本発明の混合組成物の塗膜を形成し、該塗膜を乾燥し、かつ、該混合組成物中の化合物(2)を含む重合性液晶化合物(以下、混合組成物中に含まれる液晶硬化膜を構成し得る化合物をまとめて単に「重合性液晶化合物」ともいう)を配向させる工程、および、
 配向状態を保持したまま光照射により前記重合性液晶化合物を重合させ、液晶硬化膜を形成する工程
を含む方法により製造することができる。
The retardation film of the present invention includes, for example,
A coating film of the mixed composition of the present invention is formed, the coating film is dried, and a polymerizable liquid crystal compound containing the compound (2) in the mixed composition (hereinafter, liquid crystal curing contained in the mixed composition) is dried. A step of orienting compounds that can constitute a film (also simply referred to as a "polymerizable liquid crystal compound"), and
It can be produced by a method including a step of polymerizing the polymerizable liquid crystal compound by light irradiation while maintaining the alignment state to form a cured liquid crystal film.
 混合組成物の塗膜は、基材上または配向膜上などに混合組成物を塗布することにより形成することができる。基材としては、ガラス基材や樹脂フィルム基材等の当該分野において公知の基材を適宜選択して使用し得る。また、配向膜としては、配向性ポリマーを含む配向膜、光配向膜および表面に凹凸パターンや複数の溝を有するグルブ配向膜、配向方向に延伸してある延伸フィルム等の、光学フィルム(特に位相差フィルム)の作製に一般的に用いられる配向膜を適宜選択して使用し得る。 A coating film of the mixed composition can be formed by applying the mixed composition onto a substrate or an alignment film. As the base material, any base material known in the art, such as a glass base material or a resin film base material, may be appropriately selected and used. In addition, as alignment films, optical films (especially alignment films) such as alignment films containing alignment polymers, optical alignment films, groove alignment films having uneven patterns or a plurality of grooves on the surface, and stretched films stretched in the alignment direction are used. An alignment film generally used for producing a retardation film) can be appropriately selected and used.
 混合組成物を基材等に塗布する方法としては、スピンコーティング法、エクストルージョン法、グラビアコーティング法、ダイコーティング法、バーコーティング法、アプリケータ法などの塗布法、フレキソ法などの印刷法等の公知の方法が挙げられる。 Methods for applying the mixed composition to the substrate include coating methods such as spin coating, extrusion, gravure coating, die coating, bar coating, and applicator methods, and printing methods such as flexography. Known methods may be used.
 次いで、溶剤を乾燥等により除去することにより、乾燥塗膜が形成される。乾燥方法としては、自然乾燥法、通風乾燥法、加熱乾燥および減圧乾燥法等が挙げられる。この際、混合組成物から得られた塗膜を加熱することにより、塗膜から溶剤を乾燥除去させるとともに、重合性液晶化合物を塗膜平面に対して所望の方向(例えば、水平または垂直方向)に配向させることができる。塗膜の加熱温度は、用いる重合性液晶化合物および塗膜を形成する基材等の材質などを考慮して適宜決定し得るが、重合性液晶化合物を液晶相状態へ相転移させるために、通常、液晶相転移温度以上の温度であることが必要である。混合組成物に含まれる溶剤を除去しながら、重合性液晶化合物を所望の配向状態とするため、例えば、前記混合組成物に含まれる重合性液晶化合物の液晶相転移温度(スメクチック相転移温度またはネマチック相転移温度)程度以上の温度まで加熱することができる。 Next, by removing the solvent by drying or the like, a dry coating film is formed. Examples of the drying method include natural drying, ventilation drying, heating drying, and reduced pressure drying. At this time, by heating the coating film obtained from the mixed composition, the solvent is dried and removed from the coating film, and the polymerizable liquid crystal compound is directed in a desired direction (for example, horizontally or vertically) with respect to the plane of the coating film. It can be oriented to The heating temperature of the coating film can be determined as appropriate by considering the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used and the material of the base material forming the coating film, etc., but it is usually , the temperature must be higher than the liquid crystal phase transition temperature. In order to bring the polymerizable liquid crystal compound into a desired alignment state while removing the solvent contained in the mixed composition, for example, the liquid crystal phase transition temperature (smectic phase transition temperature or nematic phase transition temperature) of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the mixed composition is adjusted. (phase transition temperature) or higher.
 本発明の混合組成物は、少なくとも化合物(2)と、化合物(1)および/または化合物(3)を含んでおり、通常、それぞれ単独の化合物が液晶相へ転移する温度よりも低い温度で液晶相へ転移することができる。このため、本発明の混合組成物を用いた位相差フィルムの製造においては、優れた光学特性を有する位相差フィルムが得られるのみならず、熱エネルギーの過剰な消費を抑えることができ、生産効率を向上させることができる。また、比較的低い温度での加熱により液晶相転移を行えることにより、混合組成物を塗布する支持基材の選択肢が広がるといった利点もある。 The mixed composition of the present invention contains at least compound (2), compound (1) and/or compound (3), and usually produces liquid crystals at a temperature lower than the temperature at which each individual compound transitions to a liquid crystal phase. can transition to a phase. Therefore, in manufacturing a retardation film using the mixed composition of the present invention, not only can a retardation film with excellent optical properties be obtained, but also excessive consumption of thermal energy can be suppressed, resulting in production efficiency. can be improved. Furthermore, since the liquid crystal phase transition can be effected by heating at a relatively low temperature, there is an advantage that the choice of supporting substrates to which the mixed composition is applied is expanded.
 加熱時間は、加熱温度、含まれる重合性液晶化合物の種類、溶剤の種類やその沸点およびその量等に応じて適宜決定し得るが、通常、15秒~10分であり、好ましくは0.5~5分である。 The heating time can be appropriately determined depending on the heating temperature, the type of polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained, the type of solvent, its boiling point, its amount, etc., but is usually 15 seconds to 10 minutes, preferably 0.5 ~5 minutes.
 塗膜からの溶剤の除去は、混合組成物に含まれる液晶化合物の液晶相転移温度以上への加熱と同時に行ってもよいし、別途で行ってもよいが、生産性向上の観点から同時に行うことが好ましい。重合性液晶化合物の液晶相転移温度以上への加熱を行う前に、混合組成物から得られた塗膜中に含まれる重合性液晶化合物が重合しない条件で塗膜中の溶剤を適度に除去させるための予備乾燥工程を設けてもよい。かかる予備乾燥工程における乾燥方法としては、自然乾燥法、通風乾燥法、加熱乾燥および減圧乾燥法等が挙げられ、該乾燥工程における乾燥温度(加熱温度)は、用いる重合性液晶化合物の種類、溶剤の種類やその沸点およびその量等に応じて適宜決定し得る。 Removal of the solvent from the coating film may be performed simultaneously with heating the liquid crystal compound contained in the mixed composition to a temperature equal to or higher than the liquid crystal phase transition temperature, or may be performed separately, but from the viewpoint of improving productivity, it may be performed simultaneously. It is preferable. Before heating the polymerizable liquid crystal compound to a temperature higher than the liquid crystal phase transition temperature, the solvent in the coating film obtained from the mixed composition is appropriately removed under conditions such that the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the coating film obtained from the mixed composition does not polymerize. A preliminary drying step may be provided for this purpose. Drying methods in this pre-drying step include natural drying, ventilation drying, heating drying, and vacuum drying, and the drying temperature (heating temperature) in this drying step depends on the type of polymerizable liquid crystal compound used and the solvent used. It can be determined as appropriate depending on the type, boiling point, amount, etc.
 次いで、得られた乾燥塗膜において、重合性液晶化合物の配向状態を保持したまま、光照射により重合性液晶化合物を重合させることにより、所望の配向状態で存在する重合性液晶化合物の重合体である液晶硬化膜が形成される。本発明の混合組成物は、重合性液晶化合物に対する損傷を抑えながら、高強度の紫外線等の光照射により高度に重合させることが可能であるため、重合方法としては、通常、光重合法が用いられる。光重合において、乾燥塗膜に照射する光としては、当該乾燥塗膜に含まれる重合開始剤の種類、重合性液晶化合物の種類およびその量に応じて適宜選択される。その具体例としては、可視光、紫外光、赤外光、X線、α線、β線およびγ線からなる群より選択される1種以上の光や活性電子線が挙げられる。中でも、重合反応の進行を制御し易い点や、光重合装置として当分野で広範に用いられているものが使用できるという点で、紫外光が好ましく、紫外光によって、光重合可能なように、混合組成物に含有される重合性液晶化合物や重合開始剤の種類を選択しておくことが好ましい。また、重合時に、適切な冷却手段により乾燥塗膜を冷却しながら光照射することで、重合温度を制御することもできる。このような冷却手段の採用により、より低温で重合性液晶化合物の重合を実施すれば、基材として比較的耐熱性が低いものを用いたとしても、適切に液晶硬化膜を形成できる。また、光照射時の熱による不具合(基材の熱による変形等)が発生しない範囲で重合温度を高くすることにより重合反応を促進することも可能である。光重合の際、マスキングや現像を行うなどによって、パターニングされた硬化膜を得ることもできる。 Next, in the obtained dry coating film, the polymerizable liquid crystal compound is polymerized by light irradiation while maintaining the orientation state of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound, thereby forming a polymer of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound existing in the desired orientation state. A certain liquid crystal cured film is formed. Since the mixed composition of the present invention can be highly polymerized by irradiation with light such as high-intensity ultraviolet rays while suppressing damage to the polymerizable liquid crystal compound, a photopolymerization method is usually used as the polymerization method. It will be done. In photopolymerization, the light irradiated onto the dry coating film is appropriately selected depending on the type of polymerization initiator, the type of polymerizable liquid crystal compound, and the amount thereof contained in the dry coating film. Specific examples include one or more types of light selected from the group consisting of visible light, ultraviolet light, infrared light, X-rays, α-rays, β-rays, and γ-rays, and active electron beams. Among these, ultraviolet light is preferable because it is easy to control the progress of the polymerization reaction and it is possible to use photopolymerization equipment that is widely used in the field. It is preferable to select the types of polymerizable liquid crystal compound and polymerization initiator contained in the mixed composition in advance. Moreover, during polymerization, the polymerization temperature can also be controlled by irradiating the dry coating film with light while cooling it with an appropriate cooling means. By employing such a cooling means and polymerizing the polymerizable liquid crystal compound at a lower temperature, a cured liquid crystal film can be appropriately formed even if a substrate with relatively low heat resistance is used. It is also possible to promote the polymerization reaction by increasing the polymerization temperature within a range that does not cause problems due to heat during light irradiation (such as deformation of the base material due to heat). A patterned cured film can also be obtained by performing masking or development during photopolymerization.
 前記活性エネルギー線の光源としては、例えば、低圧水銀ランプ、中圧水銀ランプ、高圧水銀ランプ、超高圧水銀ランプ、キセノンランプ、ハロゲンランプ、カーボンアーク灯、タングステンランプ、ガリウムランプ、エキシマレーザー、波長範囲380~440nmを発光するLED光源、ケミカルランプ、ブラックライトランプ、マイクロウェーブ励起水銀灯、メタルハライドランプ等が挙げられる。 Examples of the light source of the active energy ray include a low-pressure mercury lamp, a medium-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high-pressure mercury lamp, a xenon lamp, a halogen lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a tungsten lamp, a gallium lamp, an excimer laser, and a wavelength range. Examples include an LED light source that emits light in the range of 380 to 440 nm, a chemical lamp, a black light lamp, a microwave-excited mercury lamp, and a metal halide lamp.
 紫外線照射強度は、通常、10~3,000mW/cmである。紫外線照射強度は、好ましくは光重合開始剤の活性化に有効な波長領域における強度である。光を照射する時間は、通常0.1秒~10分であり、好ましくは0.1秒~5分、より好ましくは0.1秒~3分、さらに好ましくは0.1秒~1分である。このような紫外線照射強度で1回または複数回照射すると、その積算光量は、10~3,000mJ/cm、好ましくは50~2,000mJ/cm、より好ましくは100~1,000mJ/cmである。 The ultraviolet irradiation intensity is usually 10 to 3,000 mW/cm 2 . The ultraviolet irradiation intensity is preferably in a wavelength range effective for activating the photopolymerization initiator. The time for irradiating the light is usually 0.1 seconds to 10 minutes, preferably 0.1 seconds to 5 minutes, more preferably 0.1 seconds to 3 minutes, and even more preferably 0.1 seconds to 1 minute. be. When irradiated once or multiple times with such ultraviolet irradiation intensity, the cumulative amount of light is 10 to 3,000 mJ/cm 2 , preferably 50 to 2,000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 100 to 1,000 mJ/cm It is 2 .
 液晶硬化膜の厚みは、適用される表示装置等に応じて適宜選択できる。好ましくは0.2~3μm、より好ましくは0.2~2μmである。 The thickness of the liquid crystal cured film can be selected as appropriate depending on the display device to which it is applied. The thickness is preferably 0.2 to 3 μm, more preferably 0.2 to 2 μm.
 <円偏光板>
 本発明は、本発明の位相差フィルムを含む円偏光板を包含する。本発明の円偏光板は、通常偏光フィルムを含む。
 偏光フィルムは、偏光機能を有するフィルムであり、吸収異方性を有する色素を吸着させた延伸フィルムや吸収異方性を有する色素を塗布したフィルムを偏光子として含むフィルム等が挙げられる。このような偏光フィルムとして、例えば、特開2013-33249号、特開2013-200445号等に記載されるような、円偏光板に用いられる公知の偏光フィルムを用いることができる。
<Circular polarizing plate>
The present invention includes a circularly polarizing plate containing the retardation film of the present invention. The circularly polarizing plate of the present invention usually includes a polarizing film.
The polarizing film is a film having a polarizing function, and includes a stretched film on which a dye having absorption anisotropy is adsorbed, a film containing a film coated with a dye having absorption anisotropy as a polarizer, and the like. As such a polarizing film, for example, a known polarizing film used for a circularly polarizing plate as described in JP-A-2013-33249, JP-A-2013-200445, etc. can be used.
 本発明の円偏光板は、本発明の位相差フィルムと偏光フィルムとを含んで構成されるものであり、例えば、本発明の位相差フィルムと偏光フィルムとを接着剤層または粘着剤層等を介して積層させることにより本発明の円偏光板を得ることができる。本発明の一態様において、本発明の位相差フィルムと偏光フィルムとを積層する場合、位相差フィルムを構成する液晶硬化膜の遅相軸(光軸)と偏光フィルムの吸収軸との成す角が45±5°となるように積層することが好ましい。 The circularly polarizing plate of the present invention includes the retardation film of the present invention and the polarizing film. For example, the retardation film of the present invention and the polarizing film are combined with an adhesive layer or a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. The circularly polarizing plate of the present invention can be obtained by laminating the two layers with each other. In one embodiment of the present invention, when the retardation film of the present invention and a polarizing film are laminated, the angle between the slow axis (optical axis) of the liquid crystal cured film constituting the retardation film and the absorption axis of the polarizing film is It is preferable to stack the layers so that the angle is 45±5°.
 本発明の円偏光板は、従来の一般的な円偏光板、または偏光フィルムおよび位相差フィルムが備えるような構成を有していてよい。そのような構成としては、例えば、画像表示装置を構成する表示素子等に円偏光板を貼合するための粘着剤層(シート)、偏光フィルムや位相差フィルムの表面を傷や汚れから保護する目的で用いられるプロテクトフィルム等が挙げられる。 The circularly polarizing plate of the present invention may have a configuration similar to that of a conventional general circularly polarizing plate, or a polarizing film and a retardation film. Such structures include, for example, adhesive layers (sheets) for bonding circularly polarizing plates to display elements, etc. that constitute image display devices, and adhesive layers (sheets) for protecting the surfaces of polarizing films and retardation films from scratches and dirt. Examples include a protective film used for this purpose.
 本発明の円偏光板は、さまざまな表示装置に用いることができる。
 表示装置とは、表示素子を有する装置であり、発光源として発光素子または発光装置を含む。表示装置としては、液晶表示装置、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置、無機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置、フレキシブル画像表示装置、タッチパネル表示装置、電子放出表示装置(例えば電場放出表示装置(FED)、表面電界放出表示装置(SED))、電子ペーパー(電子インクや電気泳動素子を用いた表示装置、プラズマ表示装置、投射型表示装置(例えばグレーティングライトバルブ(GLV)表示装置、デジタルマイクロミラーデバイス(DMD)を有する表示装置)および圧電セラミックディスプレイなどが挙げられる。液晶表示装置は、透過型液晶表示装置、半透過型液晶表示装置、反射型液晶表示装置、直視型液晶表示装置および投写型液晶表示装置などのいずれをも含む。これらの表示装置は、2次元画像を表示する表示装置であってもよいし、3次元画像を表示する立体表示装置であってもよい。特に本発明の円偏光板は有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置および無機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置に好適に用いることができる。これらの表示装置(光学ディスプレイ)は、光学特性に優れる本発明の円偏光板を備えることにより、良好な画像表示特性を発現することができる。
The circularly polarizing plate of the present invention can be used in various display devices.
A display device is a device having a display element, and includes a light emitting element or a light emitting device as a light emitting source. Examples of the display device include a liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, an inorganic electroluminescence (EL) display device, a flexible image display device, a touch panel display device, an electron emission display device (for example, a field emission display (FED)), surface field emission display (SED)), electronic paper (display device using electronic ink or electrophoretic element, plasma display device, projection type display device (e.g. grating light valve (GLV) display device, digital micromirror device (DMD) ) and piezoelectric ceramic displays.Liquid crystal display devices include transmissive liquid crystal display devices, transflective liquid crystal display devices, reflective liquid crystal display devices, direct-view liquid crystal display devices, and projection type liquid crystal display devices. These display devices may be display devices that display two-dimensional images or stereoscopic display devices that display three-dimensional images.In particular, the circularly polarizing plate of the present invention can be suitably used for organic electroluminescent (EL) display devices and inorganic electroluminescent (EL) display devices.These display devices (optical displays) can be used by providing the circularly polarizing plate of the present invention with excellent optical properties. , it is possible to exhibit good image display characteristics.
 以下、実施例により本発明をより具体的に説明する。尚、例中の「%」および「部」は、特記ない限り、それぞれ質量%および質量部を意味する。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be explained in more detail with reference to Examples. In addition, "%" and "parts" in the examples mean % by mass and parts by mass, respectively, unless otherwise specified.
 各化合物の分析に用いるHPLC測定は、各化合物に由来するピークを分離できる限りいずれの条件で行ってもよい。HPLC測定条件の一例を以下に示す。
 (測定条件)
 測定装置:HPLC LC-10AT(島津製作所製)
 カラム:L-Column ODS(内径3.0mm、長さ150mm、粒径3μm)
 温度:40℃
 移動相A:0.1%(v/v)-TFA/水
 移動相B:0.1%(v/v)-TFA/アセトニトリル
 グラジエント:0min 50%-B
        30min 100%-B
        60min 100%-B
        60.01min 50%-B
        75min 50%-B
 流速:0.5mL/min
 注入量:5μL
 検出波長:350nm
HPLC measurement used for analysis of each compound may be performed under any conditions as long as peaks derived from each compound can be separated. An example of HPLC measurement conditions is shown below.
(Measurement condition)
Measuring device: HPLC LC-10AT (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation)
Column: L-Column ODS (inner diameter 3.0 mm, length 150 mm, particle size 3 μm)
Temperature: 40℃
Mobile phase A: 0.1% (v/v)-TFA/water Mobile phase B: 0.1% (v/v)-TFA/acetonitrile Gradient: 0 min 50%-B
30min 100%-B
60min 100%-B
60.01min 50%-B
75min 50%-B
Flow rate: 0.5mL/min
Injection volume: 5μL
Detection wavelength: 350nm
 実施例で使用した塩基性化合物のイオン化定数(pKa)は、pH特性溶解度法で測定した。 The ionization constant (pKa) of the basic compound used in the examples was measured by a pH characteristic solubility method.
1.混合組成物の調製
 (1)実施例1
 以下の方法に従い、化合物(P1-1)、化合物(P2-1)および化合物(P3-1)を含む混合組成物1を得た。
1. Preparation of mixed composition (1) Example 1
Mixed composition 1 containing compound (P1-1), compound (P2-1) and compound (P3-1) was obtained according to the following method.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 ジムロート冷却管および温度計を設置した300mL-四ツ口フラスコ内を窒素雰囲気とし、特許文献(特開2010-031223)を参考に合成した化合物(6a)5.0g、特許文献(特開2010-31223号)を参考に合成した化合物(1a)28.7g、DMAP(N,N-ジメチルアミノピリジン、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)0.5g(化合物(6a)1モルに対して約0.3モル)、BHT(ジブチルヒドロキシトルエン、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)0.2g、およびテトラヒドロフラン(林純薬(株)製)50gを添加して混合し、これらを50℃で4時間反応させた。反応終了後、テトラヒドロフラン溶液を濃縮乾固した後、トルエン(ナカライテスク製)50gを添加し、化合物(7a)を含む反応混合組成物1を得た。
 得られた反応混合組成物1中の化合物(6a)、化合物(1a)および化合物(7a)の面積比を高速液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した結果、化合物(6a):化合物(1a):化合物(7a)=9.5:29.7:61.2であった。
A nitrogen atmosphere was placed in a 300 mL four-necked flask equipped with a Dimroth condenser and a thermometer, and 5.0 g of compound (6a) synthesized with reference to patent document (JP 2010-031223), patent document (JP 2010-031223). 31223), 28.7 g of compound (1a), 0.5 g of DMAP (N,N-dimethylaminopyridine, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (approx. 0.3 mol), 0.2 g of BHT (dibutylhydroxytoluene, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), and 50 g of tetrahydrofuran (manufactured by Hayashi Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were added and mixed, and these were mixed at 50 °C. The reaction was allowed to proceed for 4 hours. After the reaction was completed, the tetrahydrofuran solution was concentrated to dryness, and then 50 g of toluene (manufactured by Nacalai Tesque) was added to obtain a reaction mixture composition 1 containing compound (7a).
As a result of measuring the area ratio of compound (6a), compound (1a) and compound (7a) in the obtained reaction mixture composition 1 by high performance liquid chromatography, it was found that compound (6a): compound (1a): compound (7a) )=9.5:29.7:61.2.
 次いで、特許文献(特開2016-53149号)を参考に合成した化合物(8a)6.8gを添加し、滴下漏斗を用いてIPC(ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)2.9gをさらに添加し、これらを0℃で一晩反応させた。反応終了後、濾過により不溶成分を除去した。該溶液に含まれるトルエンの質量に対して3倍の質量のメタノール(富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)150gに滴下し、固体を析出させた。続いて、析出した固体を濾過により取り出し、10gのメタノールで3回洗浄した後、30℃で減圧乾燥することにより、化合物(P1-1)、化合物(P2-1)および化合物(P3-1)を含む混合組成物1を15.0g得た。
 得られた混合組成物1中の化合物(P1-1)、化合物(P2-1)、化合物(P3-1)の比を高速液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した結果、化合物(P1-1):化合物(P2-1):化合物(P3-1)=9.5:61.2:29.4であった。なお、化合物(P1-1)および化合物(P2-1)は液晶化合物であり、化合物(P3-1)は非液晶化合物であった。
Next, 6.8 g of compound (8a) synthesized with reference to patent document (Unexamined Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-53149) was added, and IPC (diisopropylcarbodiimide, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 2. An additional 9 g was added and these were allowed to react at 0° C. overnight. After the reaction was completed, insoluble components were removed by filtration. The solution was added dropwise to 150 g of methanol (manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), which was three times the mass of toluene contained in the solution, to precipitate a solid. Subsequently, the precipitated solid was taken out by filtration, washed three times with 10 g of methanol, and then dried under reduced pressure at 30°C to obtain Compound (P1-1), Compound (P2-1), and Compound (P3-1). 15.0 g of Mixed Composition 1 containing:
As a result of measuring the ratio of compound (P1-1), compound (P2-1), and compound (P3-1) in the obtained mixed composition 1 by high performance liquid chromatography, it was found that compound (P1-1): compound ( P2-1): Compound (P3-1) = 9.5:61.2:29.4. Note that Compound (P1-1) and Compound (P2-1) were liquid crystal compounds, and Compound (P3-1) was a non-liquid crystal compound.
 (2)実施例2
 以下の方法に従い、化合物(P2-1)および化合物(P3-1)を含む混合組成物2を得た。
 ジムロート冷却管および温度計を設置した300mL-四ツ口フラスコ内を窒素雰囲気とし、特許文献(特開2010-031223)を参考に合成した化合物(6a)5.0g、特許文献(特開2010-31223号)を参考に合成した化合物(1a)28.7g、DBU(ジアザビシクロウンデセン、東京化成(株)製)0.5g(化合物(6a)1モルに対して約0.2モル)、BHT(ジブチルヒドロキシトルエン、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)0.2g、およびテトラヒドロフラン(林純薬(株)製)50gを添加して混合し、これらを50℃で24時間反応させた。反応終了後、テトラヒドロフラン溶液を濃縮乾固した後、トルエン(ナカライテスク製)50gを添加し、化合物(7a)を含む反応混合組成物2を得た。
 得られた反応混合組成物2中の化合物(6a)、化合物(1a)および化合物(7a)の面積比を高速液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した結果、化合物(6a):化合物(1a):化合物(7a)=0.0:21.8:78.2であった。
(2) Example 2
Mixed composition 2 containing compound (P2-1) and compound (P3-1) was obtained according to the following method.
A nitrogen atmosphere was placed in a 300 mL four-necked flask equipped with a Dimroth condenser and a thermometer, and 5.0 g of compound (6a) synthesized with reference to patent document (JP 2010-031223), patent document (JP 2010-031223). 28.7 g of compound (1a) synthesized with reference to No. 31223), 0.5 g of DBU (diazabicycloundecene, manufactured by Tokyo Kasei Co., Ltd.) (about 0.2 mol per 1 mol of compound (6a)) , 0.2 g of BHT (dibutylhydroxytoluene, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), and 50 g of tetrahydrofuran (manufactured by Hayashi Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were added and mixed, and these were reacted at 50° C. for 24 hours. . After the reaction was completed, the tetrahydrofuran solution was concentrated to dryness, and then 50 g of toluene (manufactured by Nacalai Tesque) was added to obtain a reaction mixture composition 2 containing compound (7a).
As a result of measuring the area ratio of compound (6a), compound (1a) and compound (7a) in the obtained reaction mixture composition 2 by high performance liquid chromatography, it was found that compound (6a): compound (1a): compound (7a) )=0.0:21.8:78.2.
 次いで、特許文献(特開2016-53149号)を参考に合成した化合物(8a)6.8gを添加し、滴下漏斗を用いてIPC(ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)2.9gをさらに添加し、これらを0℃で一晩反応させた。反応終了後、濾過により不溶成分を除去した。該溶液に含まれるトルエンの質量に対して3倍の質量のメタノール(富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)150gに滴下し、固体を析出させた。続いて、析出した固体を濾過により取り出し、10gのメタノールで3回洗浄した後、30℃で減圧乾燥することにより、化合物(P2-1)および化合物(P3-1)を含む混合組成物2を15.0g得た。
 得られた混合組成物2中の化合物(P1-1)、化合物(P2-1)、化合物(P3-1)の比を高速液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した結果、(P1-1):(P2-1):(P3-1)=0.0:78.2:21.8であった。
Next, 6.8 g of compound (8a) synthesized with reference to patent document (JP 2016-53149) was added, and IPC (diisopropylcarbodiimide, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 2. An additional 9 g was added and these were allowed to react at 0° C. overnight. After the reaction was completed, insoluble components were removed by filtration. The solution was added dropwise to 150 g of methanol (manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), which was three times the mass of toluene contained in the solution, to precipitate a solid. Subsequently, the precipitated solid was taken out by filtration, washed three times with 10 g of methanol, and then dried under reduced pressure at 30°C to obtain mixed composition 2 containing compound (P2-1) and compound (P3-1). 15.0g was obtained.
As a result of measuring the ratio of compound (P1-1), compound (P2-1), and compound (P3-1) in the obtained mixed composition 2 by high performance liquid chromatography, it was found that (P1-1):(P2- 1):(P3-1)=0.0:78.2:21.8.
 (3)実施例3
 以下の方法に従い、化合物(P1-1)および化合物(P2-1)を含む混合組成物3を得た。
 ジムロート冷却管および温度計を設置した300mL-四ツ口フラスコ内を窒素雰囲気とし、特許文献(特開2010-031223)を参考に合成した化合物(6a)5.0g、特許文献(特開2010-31223号)を参考に合成した化合物(1a)10.3g、DBU(ジアザビシクロウンデセン、東京化成(株)製)0.5g(化合物(6a)1モルに対して約0.2モル)、BHT(ジブチルヒドロキシトルエン、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)0.2g、およびテトラヒドロフラン(林純薬(株)製)50gを添加して混合し、これらを50℃で24時間反応させた。反応終了後、テトラヒドロフラン溶液を濃縮乾固した後、トルエン(ナカライテスク製)50gを添加し、化合物(7a)を含む反応混合組成物3を得た。
 得られた反応混合組成物3中の化合物(6a)、化合物(1a)および化合物(7a)の面積比を高速液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した結果、化合物(6a):化合物(1a):化合物(7a)=22.4:0.0:77.6であった。
(3) Example 3
Mixed composition 3 containing compound (P1-1) and compound (P2-1) was obtained according to the following method.
A nitrogen atmosphere was placed in a 300 mL four-necked flask equipped with a Dimroth condenser and a thermometer, and 5.0 g of compound (6a) synthesized with reference to patent document (JP 2010-031223), patent document (JP 2010-031223). 10.3 g of compound (1a) synthesized with reference to No. 31223), 0.5 g of DBU (diazabicycloundecene, manufactured by Tokyo Kasei Co., Ltd.) (about 0.2 mol per 1 mol of compound (6a)) , 0.2 g of BHT (dibutylhydroxytoluene, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), and 50 g of tetrahydrofuran (manufactured by Hayashi Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were added and mixed, and these were reacted at 50° C. for 24 hours. . After the reaction was completed, the tetrahydrofuran solution was concentrated to dryness, and then 50 g of toluene (manufactured by Nacalai Tesque) was added to obtain a reaction mixture composition 3 containing compound (7a).
As a result of measuring the area ratio of compound (6a), compound (1a) and compound (7a) in the obtained reaction mixture composition 3 by high performance liquid chromatography, it was found that compound (6a): compound (1a): compound (7a) )=22.4:0.0:77.6.
 次いで、特許文献(特開2016-53149号)を参考に合成した化合物(8a)6.8gを添加し、滴下漏斗を用いてIPC(ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)2.9gをさらに添加し、これらを0℃で一晩反応させた。反応終了後、濾過により不溶成分を除去した。該溶液に含まれるトルエンの質量に対して3倍の質量のメタノール(富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)150gに滴下し、固体を析出させた。続いて、析出した固体を濾過により取り出し、10gのメタノールで3回洗浄した後、30℃で減圧乾燥することにより、化合物(P1-1)および化合物(P2-1)を含む混合組成物3を15.0g得た。
 得られた混合組成物3中の化合物(P1-1)、化合物(P2-1)、化合物(P3-1)の比を高速液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した結果、化合物(P1-1):化合物(P2-1):化合物(P3-1)=22.4:77.6:0.0であった。
Next, 6.8 g of compound (8a) synthesized with reference to patent document (Unexamined Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-53149) was added, and IPC (diisopropylcarbodiimide, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 2. An additional 9 g was added and these were allowed to react at 0° C. overnight. After the reaction was completed, insoluble components were removed by filtration. The solution was added dropwise to 150 g of methanol (manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), which was three times the mass of toluene contained in the solution, to precipitate a solid. Subsequently, the precipitated solid was taken out by filtration, washed three times with 10 g of methanol, and then dried under reduced pressure at 30°C to obtain mixed composition 3 containing compound (P1-1) and compound (P2-1). 15.0g was obtained.
As a result of measuring the ratio of compound (P1-1), compound (P2-1), and compound (P3-1) in the obtained mixed composition 3 by high performance liquid chromatography, it was found that compound (P1-1): compound ( P2-1): Compound (P3-1) = 22.4:77.6:0.0.
 (4)比較例1
 ジムロート冷却管および温度計を設置した300mL-四ツ口フラスコ内を窒素雰囲気とし、特許文献(特開2010-031223)を参考に合成した化合物(6a)5.0g、特許文献(特開2016-53149号)を参考に合成した化合物(8a)9.5g、DMAP(N,N-ジメチルアミノピリジン、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)0.2g、BHT(ジブチルヒドロキシトルエン、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)0.2g、およびクロロホルム(ナカライテスク製)50gを添加した。滴下漏斗を用いてIPC(ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)4.0gをさらに添加し、これらを0℃で一晩反応させた。反応終了後、濾過により不溶成分を除去した。該溶液に含まれるトルエンの質量に対して3倍の質量のメタノール(富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)150gに滴下し、固体を析出させた。続いて、析出した固体を濾過により取り出し、10gのメタノールで3回洗浄した後、30℃で減圧乾燥することにより、化合物(P3-1)を含む組成物4を15.0g得た。
 得られた組成物4に、化合物(2)に相当する化合物は含まれていなかった。
(4) Comparative example 1
A nitrogen atmosphere was placed in a 300 mL four-necked flask equipped with a Dimroth condenser and a thermometer, and 5.0 g of compound (6a) synthesized with reference to patent document (JP 2010-031223), patent document (JP 2016-2016) 9.5 g of compound (8a) synthesized with reference to No. 53149), 0.2 g of DMAP (N,N-dimethylaminopyridine, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), and BHT (dibutylhydroxytoluene, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.). 0.2 g (manufactured by Yakuza Co., Ltd.) and 50 g of chloroform (manufactured by Nacalai Tesque) were added. Using a dropping funnel, 4.0 g of IPC (diisopropylcarbodiimide, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was further added, and the mixture was reacted at 0° C. overnight. After the reaction was completed, insoluble components were removed by filtration. The solution was added dropwise to 150 g of methanol (manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), which was three times the mass of toluene contained in the solution, to precipitate a solid. Subsequently, the precipitated solid was taken out by filtration, washed three times with 10 g of methanol, and then dried under reduced pressure at 30° C. to obtain 15.0 g of Composition 4 containing Compound (P3-1).
The resulting composition 4 did not contain a compound corresponding to compound (2).
 (5)比較例2
 以下の方法に従い、化合物(P1-1)、化合物(P2-1)および化合物(P3-1)を含む混合組成物5を得た。
(5) Comparative example 2
Mixed composition 5 containing compound (P1-1), compound (P2-1) and compound (P3-1) was obtained according to the following method.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 ジムロート冷却管および温度計を設置した300mL-四ツ口フラスコ内を窒素雰囲気とし、特許文献(特開2010-031223)を参考に合成した化合物(6a)5.0g、特許文献(特開2016-53149号)を参考に合成した化合物(8a)2.5g、特許文献(特開2010-031223)を参考に合成した化合物(8b)7.3g、DMAP(N,N-ジメチルアミノピリジン、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)0.2g、BHT(ジブチルヒドロキシトルエン、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)0.2g、およびクロロホルム(ナカライテスク製)50gを添加した。滴下漏斗を用いてIPC(ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)4.0gをさらに添加し、これらを0℃で一晩反応させた。反応終了後、濾過により不溶成分を除去した。該溶液に含まれるクロロホルムの質量に対して3倍の質量のメタノール(富士フィルム和光純薬(株)製)150gに滴下し、固体を析出させた。続いて、析出した固体を濾過により取り出し、10gのメタノールで3回洗浄した後、30℃で減圧乾燥することにより、化合物(P1-1)、化合物(P2-1)および化合物(P3-1)を含む混合組成物5を15.0g得た。
 得られた混合組成物5中の化合物(P1-1)、化合物(P2-1)、化合物(P3-1)の比を高速液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した結果、(P1-1):(P2-1):(P3-1)=3.1:36.4:60.4であった。
A nitrogen atmosphere was placed in a 300 mL four-necked flask equipped with a Dimroth condenser and a thermometer, and 5.0 g of compound (6a) synthesized with reference to the patent document (JP 2010-031223) and the patent document (JP 2016-2016) 2.5 g of compound (8a) synthesized with reference to Patent Document No. 53149), 7.3 g of compound (8b) synthesized with reference to patent document (JP 2010-031223), DMAP (N,N-dimethylaminopyridine, Fuji Film 0.2 g of BHT (dibutylhydroxytoluene, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), and 50 g of chloroform (manufactured by Nacalai Tesque) were added. Using a dropping funnel, 4.0 g of IPC (diisopropylcarbodiimide, manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was further added, and the mixture was reacted at 0° C. overnight. After the reaction was completed, insoluble components were removed by filtration. The solution was added dropwise to 150 g of methanol (manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) three times the mass of chloroform contained in the solution to precipitate a solid. Subsequently, the precipitated solid was taken out by filtration, washed three times with 10 g of methanol, and then dried under reduced pressure at 30° C. to form Compound (P1-1), Compound (P2-1), and Compound (P3-1). 15.0g of Mixed Composition 5 containing the following was obtained.
As a result of measuring the ratio of compound (P1-1), compound (P2-1), and compound (P3-1) in the obtained mixed composition 5 by high performance liquid chromatography, it was found that (P1-1):(P2- 1):(P3-1)=3.1:36.4:60.4.
2.混合組成物の評価
 (1)相転移温度の測定
 相転移温度は、温度調節ステージを備えた偏光顕微鏡や、示差走査熱量計(DSC)、熱重量示差熱分析装置(TG-DTA)等を用いて測定することができる。具体的には、温度調節ステージを備えた偏光顕微鏡(LEXT、オリンパス社製)を用いて、以下に従い測定した。
 上記で得られた混合組成物1~5を、それぞれ、バイアル管に1g量り取り、さらに2gのクロロホルムを加え溶解させた。得られた溶液を、ラビング処理を施したPVA配向膜付きのガラス基板に塗布し、乾燥させた。この基盤を冷却加熱装置(ジャパンハイテック社製「LNP94-2」)にのせて室温から180℃まで昇温させた後、室温まで冷却した。温度変化時の様子を偏光顕微鏡(LEXT、オリンパス社製)で観察し、ネマチック相となる温度を測定し、ネマチック相転移温度とした。結果を表2に示す。
2. Evaluation of mixed composition (1) Measurement of phase transition temperature The phase transition temperature is measured using a polarizing microscope equipped with a temperature control stage, a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC), a thermogravimetric differential thermal analyzer (TG-DTA), etc. can be measured. Specifically, the measurement was performed using a polarizing microscope (LEXT, manufactured by Olympus Corporation) equipped with a temperature control stage in accordance with the following.
1 g of each of the mixed compositions 1 to 5 obtained above was weighed into a vial, and 2 g of chloroform was added and dissolved. The obtained solution was applied to a rubbed glass substrate with a PVA alignment film and dried. This substrate was placed on a cooling/heating device ("LNP94-2" manufactured by Japan Hitech), heated from room temperature to 180° C., and then cooled to room temperature. The changes in temperature were observed using a polarizing microscope (LEXT, manufactured by Olympus), and the temperature at which the nematic phase occurred was measured, which was defined as the nematic phase transition temperature. The results are shown in Table 2.
 (2)光学特性の評価
 (i)重合性液晶組成物の調製
 バイアル管に、混合組成物1~5を投入し、表1に記載の組成に従い、光重合開始剤、レベリング剤、重合禁止剤および溶剤を仕込み、カルーセルを用いて80℃で30分撹拌し、重合性液晶組成物1を得た。
 なお、表1に示す光重合開始剤、レベリング剤および重合禁止剤の量は、実施例1で得た混合組成物100質量部に対する仕込み量である。また、溶剤の配合量は、組成物の質量%が溶液全量に対して13%となるように設定した。
(2) Evaluation of optical properties (i) Preparation of polymerizable liquid crystal composition Put mixed compositions 1 to 5 into a vial tube, add photopolymerization initiator, leveling agent, and polymerization inhibitor according to the compositions listed in Table 1. and a solvent were charged and stirred for 30 minutes at 80° C. using a carousel to obtain polymerizable liquid crystal composition 1.
The amounts of the photopolymerization initiator, leveling agent, and polymerization inhibitor shown in Table 1 are the amounts added to 100 parts by mass of the mixed composition obtained in Example 1. Further, the amount of the solvent blended was set so that the mass % of the composition was 13% with respect to the total amount of the solution.
 重合開始剤:2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルホリノフェニル)ブタン-1-オン(イルガキュア369;BASFジャパン社製)
 レベリング剤:ポリアクリレート化合物(BYK-361N;ビックケミージャパン製)
 重合禁止剤:BHT(和光純薬工業(株)製)
 溶剤:N-メチルピロリドン(NMP;関東化学(株)製)
Polymerization initiator: 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinophenyl)butan-1-one (Irgacure 369; manufactured by BASF Japan)
Leveling agent: polyacrylate compound (BYK-361N; manufactured by BYK Chemie Japan)
Polymerization inhibitor: BHT (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
Solvent: N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP; manufactured by Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd.)
 (ii)光学フィルムの作製
 〔光配向膜形成用組成物の調製〕
 下記成分を混合し、得られた混合物を80℃で1時間攪拌することにより、光配向膜形成用組成物を得た。
 次の式で示される光配向性材料(5部):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
(数平均分子量:約28000)
溶剤(95部):シクロペンタノン
(ii) Preparation of optical film [Preparation of composition for forming photoalignment film]
A composition for forming a photo-alignment film was obtained by mixing the following components and stirring the resulting mixture at 80° C. for 1 hour.
Photoalignable material (5 parts) represented by the following formula:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
(Number average molecular weight: approx. 28,000)
Solvent (95 parts): cyclopentanone
 〔光学フィルム(位相差フィルム)の製造〕
 以下のようにして光学フィルムを製造した。シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(COP)(ZF-14、日本ゼオン株式会社製)を、コロナ処理装置(AGF-B10、春日電機株式会社製)を用いて出力0.3kW、処理速度3m/分の条件で1回処理した。コロナ処理を施した表面に、前記光配向膜形成用組成物をバーコーター塗布した。80℃で1分間乾燥し、偏光UV照射装置(SPOT CURE SP-7;ウシオ電機株式会社製)を用いて、100mJ/cmの積算光量で偏光UV露光を実施した。得られた配向膜の膜厚をレーザー顕微鏡(LEXT、オリンパス株式会社製)で測定したところ、100nmであった。
[Manufacture of optical film (retardation film)]
An optical film was manufactured as follows. Cycloolefin polymer film (COP) (ZF-14, manufactured by Zeon Corporation) was processed using a corona treatment device (AGF-B10, manufactured by Kasuga Denki Co., Ltd.) at an output of 0.3 kW and a processing speed of 3 m/min. Treated once. The photo-alignment film forming composition was applied to the corona-treated surface using a bar coater. It was dried at 80° C. for 1 minute, and exposed to polarized UV light using a polarized UV irradiation device (SPOT CURE SP-7; manufactured by Ushio Inc.) at an integrated light intensity of 100 mJ/cm 2 . The thickness of the obtained alignment film was measured using a laser microscope (LEXT, manufactured by Olympus Corporation) and was found to be 100 nm.
 重合性液晶組成物1を配向膜上にスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、120℃で1分間乾燥した後、高圧水銀ランプ(ユニキュアVB―15201BY-A、ウシオ電機株式会社製)を用いて、紫外線を照射(窒素雰囲気下、波長:365nm、波長365nmにおける積算光量:1000mJ/cm)することにより光学フィルムを作製した。上記で作製した光学フィルムを測定試料とし、測定機(王子計測機器社製「KOBRA-WR」)を用いて、波長450nmおよび波長550nmの光に対する正面位相差値を測定して、Re(450)/Re(550)を算出した。結果を表2に示す。 Polymerizable liquid crystal composition 1 was applied onto the alignment film using a spin coater, dried at 120°C for 1 minute, and then exposed to ultraviolet light using a high-pressure mercury lamp (Unicure VB-15201BY-A, manufactured by Ushio Inc.). An optical film was produced by irradiating (under nitrogen atmosphere, wavelength: 365 nm, integrated light amount at wavelength 365 nm: 1000 mJ/cm 2 ). Using the optical film produced above as a measurement sample, the front retardation value for light with a wavelength of 450 nm and a wavelength of 550 nm was measured using a measuring device ("KOBRA-WR" manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments Co., Ltd.), and Re(450) was measured. /Re(550) was calculated. The results are shown in Table 2.
 上記と同様にして、混合組成物2~5についても重合性液晶組成物2~5を調製して、光学フィルムを作製し、それぞれ光学特性を評価した。結果を表2に示す。 In the same manner as above, polymerizable liquid crystal compositions 2 to 5 were prepared for mixed compositions 2 to 5, optical films were produced, and the optical properties of each were evaluated. The results are shown in Table 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000052

Claims (14)

  1.  下記式(2)で表される化合物と、式(1)で表される化合物および式(3)で表される化合物のうちの少なくとも1つとを含む混合組成物であって、式(2)で表される化合物の液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した面積百分率値が、混合組成物に含まれる式(1)で表される化合物、式(2)で表される化合物および式(3)で表される化合物の面積値の合計に基づいて、50%を超え95%未満である、混合組成物。
     A-Ar-A   (1)
     A-Ar-B   (2)
     B-Ar-B   (3)
     [式(1)および式(2)中のAは、下記式(4):
     *-D-(A-E)m-SP-L   (4)
    で表され、
     式(2)および式(3)中のBは、下記式(5):
     *-D-(A-E)n-SP-L   (5)
    で表され、
     式(4)および式(5)中、
     *は式(1)、式(2)または式(3)中のArとの結合位置を表し、
     mおよびnは、それぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、かつ、mとnとは互いに異なり、
     DおよびDは、それぞれ独立に、-C(=O)-O-または-O-C(=O)-を表し、
     EおよびEは、それぞれ独立に、単結合、または、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-C(=S)-、-CR-、-CR=CR-、-NR-、若しくは、これらの2以上の組み合わせからなる2価の連結基を表し、R~Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるEは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、nが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるEは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、
     AおよびAは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の2価の芳香族炭化水素基、または、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の2価の脂環式炭化水素基を表し、mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるAは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、nが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるAは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、
     SPおよびSPは、それぞれ独立に、単結合、炭素数1~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルケニレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキニレン基、または、前記アルキレン基、前記アルケニレン基および前記アルキニレン基を構成する-CH-の1以上が-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(Q)-、若しくは、-CO-に置換された2価の連結基を表し、Qは置換基を表し、
     LおよびLは、それぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、LおよびLの少なくとも一方は重合性基であり、
     式(1)~(3)中のArは、下記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)のいずれかで表される基である:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000001
    〔式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)中、
     *は、DまたはDとの結合部を表す;
     Qは-S-、-O-または-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表し、
     Qは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
     WおよびWは、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
     Yは炭素数1~6のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
     YはCN基または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-、-CO-、-O-CO-または-CO-O-で置換されていてもよい;
     Z、ZおよびZは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表し、ZおよびZは、互いに結合して芳香環または芳香族複素環を形成してもよく、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
     Zは、炭素数2~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
     Axは芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、Ayは水素原子、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基、または芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、AxとAyは結合して環を形成してもよい;
     YおよびYは、それぞれ独立して、下記式(Y-1):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000002
    〔式(Y-1)中、
     RY1は水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基は、1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、置換基Xは、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子、ペンタフルオロスルフラニル基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、イソシアノ基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシル基、メルカプト基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ジイソプロピルアミノ基、トリメチルシリル基、ジメチルシリル基、チオイソシアノ基、または、1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-が各々独立して-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖状または分岐状アルキル基を表し、該アルキル基中の任意の水素原子はフッ素原子に置換されてもよく、或いは、-B31-F31-P31で表される基であってもよく(ここで、B31は、-CR-、-CH-CH-、-O-、-S-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-C(=S)-O-、-O-C(=S)-、-O-C(=S)-O-、-CO-NR-、-NR-CO-、-O-CH-、-CH-O-、-S-CH-、-CH-S-または単結合を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し;F31は、炭素数1~12のアルカンジイル基を表し、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる水素原子は、-OR10またはハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、R10は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-または-CO-で置き換わっていてもよく;P31は、水素原子または重合性基を表す)、
     Uは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよく、芳香族炭化水素基は、1つ以上の前記置換基Xによって置換されていてもよい;
     Tは、-O-、-S-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCO-O-、-NU-、-N=CU-、-CO-NU-、-OCO-NU-またはO-NU-を表し、Uは水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基、芳香族炭化水素基(該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよい)を有する炭素数2~30の有機基、または(E31-A31-B31-F31-P31を表し、該アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基および芳香族炭化水素基はそれぞれ、無置換であるかまたは1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基は該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基によって置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-SO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよく、該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-またはO-CO-O-に置き換えられてもよく、E31は前記B31と同様に定義され、A31は、炭素数3~16の2価の脂環式炭化水素基または炭素数6~20の2価の芳香族炭化水素基を表し、該脂環式炭化水素基および該芳香族炭化水素基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子、-R11、-OR12、シアノ基またはニトロ基で置換されていてもよく、R11は、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、R12は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよく、B31、F31およびP31は、それぞれ、前記B31、F31およびP31と同じ意味を有し、qは0~4の整数を表し、E31および/またはA31が複数存在する場合は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、UとUとが結合して環を構成していてもよい〕
    から選ばれる基を表す。]
    A mixed composition comprising a compound represented by the following formula (2) and at least one of a compound represented by the formula (1) and a compound represented by the formula (3), the composition comprising the compound represented by the formula (2) The area percentage value measured by liquid chromatography of the compound represented by is the compound represented by formula (1), the compound represented by formula (2), and the compound represented by formula (3) contained in the mixed composition. more than 50% and less than 95%, based on the sum of the area values of the compounds.
    A-Ar-A (1)
    A-Ar-B (2)
    B-Ar-B (3)
    [A in formula (1) and formula (2) is the following formula (4):
    *-D 1 -(A 1 -E 1 )m-SP 1 -L 1 (4)
    It is expressed as
    B in formula (2) and formula (3) is the following formula (5):
    *-D 2 -(A 2 -E 2 )n-SP 2 -L 2 (5)
    It is expressed as
    In formula (4) and formula (5),
    * represents the bonding position with Ar in formula (1), formula (2) or formula (3),
    m and n each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, and m and n are different from each other,
    D 1 and D 2 each independently represent -C(=O)-O- or -O-C(=O)-,
    E 1 and E 2 are each independently a single bond, or -CO-, -O-, -S-, -C(=S)-, -CR 1 R 2 -, -CR 3 =CR 4 - , -NR 5 -, or a combination of two or more thereof, and R 1 to R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. If m is an integer greater than or equal to 2, the plurality of E1 's may be the same or different, and if n is an integer greater than or equal to 2, the plurality of E2 's may be the same or different. may be different,
    A 1 and A 2 are each independently a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Represents a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group, when m is an integer of 2 or more, the plurality of A1s may be the same or different, and when n is an integer of 2 or more, Multiple A2s may be the same or different,
    SP 1 and SP 2 each independently represent a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms; 20 linear or branched alkynylene groups, or one or more of -CH 2 - constituting the alkylene group, the alkenylene group, and the alkynylene group is -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N (Q) represents a divalent linking group substituted with - or -CO-, Q represents a substituent,
    L 1 and L 2 each independently represent a monovalent organic group, at least one of L 1 and L 2 is a polymerizable group,
    Ar in formulas (1) to (3) is a group represented by any of the following formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000001
    [In formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6),
    * represents a bond with D 1 or D 2 ;
    Q 1 represents -S-, -O- or -NR 6 -, R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent,
    Q2 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent;
    W 1 and W 2 each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 6 -, and R 6 is a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 to 6 which may have a substituent. represents an alkyl group;
    Y 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, or an aromatic heterocyclic group,
    Y 2 represents a CN group or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom. -CH 2 - may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -O-CO- or -CO-O-;
    Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a monovalent carbon atom 6 to 20 aromatic hydrocarbon groups, halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and Z 1 and Z 2 are bonded to each other to form an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocycle. R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
    Z 4 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, represents a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
    Ax represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ay may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ax and Ay are a bond. may form a ring;
    Y 3 and Y 4 each independently represent the following formula (Y 3 -1):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000002
    [In formula (Y 3 -1),
    R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents X 3 , and the substituent X 3 is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, Bromine atom, iodine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, amino group, hydroxyl group, mercapto group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethyl A silyl group, a thioisocyano group, or one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, - OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -CH=CH-COO-, -CH=CH-OCO- , -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or -C≡C-, a linear or It represents a branched alkyl group, and any hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, or it may be a group represented by -B 31 -F 31 -P 31 (wherein , B 31 is -CR 8 R 9 -, -CH 2 -CH 2 -, -O-, -S-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -C (=S)-O-, -OC(=S)-, -OC(=S)-O-, -CO-NR 8 -, -NR 8 -CO-, -O-CH 2 - , -CH 2 -O-, -S-CH 2 -, -CH 2 -S- or a single bond, and R 8 and R 9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a C 1-4 carbon atom. represents an alkyl group; F 31 represents an alkanediyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkanediyl group may be substituted with -OR 10 or a halogen atom, and R 10 is a carbon Represents an alkyl group of numbers 1 to 4, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and -CH 2 - contained in the alkanediyl group is -O- or -CO- may be substituted with; P 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group),
    U 1 represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom, and the aromatic hydrocarbon group is , may be substituted by one or more of the above substituents X3 ;
    T 1 is -O-, -S-, -COO-, -OCO-, -OCO-O-, -NU 2 -, -N=CU 2 -, -CO-NU 2 -, -OCO-NU 2 - or O-NU 2 -, and U 2 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. (any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom), or (E 31 -A 31 ) q -B 31 -F 31 - P31 , and each of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, cycloalkenyl group and aromatic hydrocarbon group may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents X3 , and the alkyl group may be substituted by the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in the alkyl group are each independently substituted with -O -, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -SO 2 -, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, - NH-CO-, -CH=CH-COO-, -CH=CH-OCO-, -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or - It may be replaced by C≡C-, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group are each independently -O-, It may be replaced with -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- or O-CO-O-, E 31 is defined in the same manner as B 31 above, and A 31 is a divalent group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms. It represents an alicyclic hydrocarbon group or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and the hydrogen atoms contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group are halogen atoms, -R 11 , -OR 12 , which may be substituted with a cyano group or a nitro group, R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 12 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. represents a group, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and B 31 , F 31 and P 31 have the same meanings as the above B 31 , F 31 and P 31 , respectively. However, q represents an integer from 0 to 4, and when multiple E 31 and/or A 31 exist, they may be the same or different, and U 1 and U 2 combine to form a ring. ]
    represents a group selected from ]
  2.  式(4)中のmおよび式(5)中のnの一方が1であり、他方が2である、請求項1に記載の混合組成物。 The mixed composition according to claim 1, wherein one of m in formula (4) and n in formula (5) is 1 and the other is 2.
  3.  式(4)中のAおよび式(5)中のAが、それぞれ独立に、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基または1,4-フェニレンジイル基である、請求項1または2に記載の混合組成物。 The mixture according to claim 1 or 2, wherein A 1 in formula (4) and A 2 in formula (5) are each independently a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group or a 1,4-phenylenediyl group. Composition.
  4.  式(4)中、mが1であり、かつ、Aが1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基である、請求項1または2に記載の混合組成物。 The mixed composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein in formula (4), m is 1 and A 1 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group.
  5.  式(5)中、nが1であり、かつ、Aが1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基である、請求項1または2に記載の混合組成物。 The mixed composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein in formula (5), n is 1 and A 2 is a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group.
  6.  式(4)中のLおよび式(5)中のLが、それぞれ、アクリロイルオキシ基である、請求項1または2に記載の混合組成物。 The mixed composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein L 1 in formula (4) and L 2 in formula (5) are each an acryloyloxy group.
  7.  式(1)~(3)中のArが、式(Ar-1)、式(Ar-3)および式(Ar-4)のいずれかで表される基である、請求項1または2に記載の混合組成物。 Claim 1 or 2, wherein Ar in formulas (1) to (3) is a group represented by any one of formula (Ar-1), formula (Ar-3) and formula (Ar-4). Mixture composition as described.
  8.  光重合開始剤をさらに含む、請求項1または2に記載の混合組成物。 The mixed composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a photopolymerization initiator.
  9.  有機溶剤をさらに含む、請求項1または2に記載の混合組成物。 The mixed composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising an organic solvent.
  10.  請求項1に記載の混合組成物の硬化物を含む位相差フィルム。 A retardation film comprising a cured product of the mixed composition according to claim 1.
  11.  請求項10に記載の位相差フィルムを含む円偏光板。 A circularly polarizing plate comprising the retardation film according to claim 10.
  12.  式(1)で表される化合物と式(6)で表される化合物とを、塩基性化合物の存在下で反応させて、式(7)で表される化合物を含む反応混合組成物を得る工程を含み、前記反応混合物における式(7)で表される化合物の液体クロマトグラフィーで測定した面積百分率値が、反応混合組成物に含まれる式(1)で表される化合物、式(6)で表される化合物および式(7)で表される化合物の面積値の合計に基づいて50%を超え95%未満である、式(7)で表される化合物を含む反応混合組成物の製造方法。
     A-Ar-A     (1)
     HO-Ar-OH   (6)
     A-Ar-OH    (7)
     [式(1)および式(7)中のAは、下記式(4):
     *-D-(A-E)m-SP-L   (4)
    で表され、
     式(4)中、*は式(1)または式(7)中のArとの結合位置を表し、
     mは1以上の整数を表し、
     Dは、-C(=O)-O-または-O-C(=O)-を表し、
     Eは、単結合、または、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-C(=S)-、-CR-、-CR=CR-、-NR-、若しくは、これらの2以上の組み合わせからなる2価の連結基を表し、R~Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるEは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、
     Aは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の2価の芳香族炭化水素基、または、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上の2価の脂環式炭化水素基を表し、mが2以上の整数である場合、複数あるAは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、
     SPは、単結合、炭素数1~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルケニレン基、炭素数2~20の直鎖状もしくは分岐状のアルキニレン基、または、前記アルキレン基、前記アルケニレン基および前記アルキニレン基を構成する-CH-の1以上が-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(Q)-、若しくは、-CO-に置換された2価の連結基を表し、Qは置換基を表し、
     Lは、1価の有機基を表し、
     式(1)、式(6)および式(7)中のArは、下記式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)のいずれかで表される基である:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000003
    〔式(Ar-1)~(Ar-6)中、
     *は、DまたはDとの結合部を表す;
     Qは-S-、-O-または-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表し、
     Qは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
     WおよびWは、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR-を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
     Yは炭素数1~6のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
     YはCN基または置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-、-CO-、-O-CO-または-CO-O-で置換されていてもよい;
     Z、ZおよびZは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表し、ZおよびZは、互いに結合して芳香環または芳香族複素環を形成してもよく、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
     Zは、炭素数2~20の脂肪族炭化水素基またはアルコキシ基、炭素数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基、1価の炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、-NRまたは-SRを表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
     Axは芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、Ayは水素原子、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基、または芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの芳香環を有する、炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、AxとAyは結合して環を形成してもよい;
     YおよびYは、それぞれ独立して、下記式(Y-1):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000004
    〔式(Y-1)中、
     RY1は水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基は、1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、置換基Xは、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子、ペンタフルオロスルフラニル基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、イソシアノ基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシル基、メルカプト基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ジイソプロピルアミノ基、トリメチルシリル基、ジメチルシリル基、チオイソシアノ基、または、1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-が各々独立して-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖状または分岐状アルキル基を表し、該アルキル基中の任意の水素原子はフッ素原子に置換されてもよく、或いは、-B31-F31-P31で表される基であってもよく(ここで、B31は、-CR-、-CH-CH-、-O-、-S-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-C(=S)-O-、-O-C(=S)-、-O-C(=S)-O-、-CO-NR-、-NR-CO-、-O-CH-、-CH-O-、-S-CH-、-CH-S-または単結合を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し;F31は、炭素数1~12のアルカンジイル基を表し、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる水素原子は、-OR10またはハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよく、R10は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよく、該アルカンジイル基に含まれる-CH-は、-O-または-CO-で置き換わっていてもよく;P31は、水素原子または重合性基を表す)、
     Uは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する炭素数2~30の有機基を表し、該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよく、芳香族炭化水素基は、1つ以上の前記置換基Xによって置換されていてもよい;
     Tは、-O-、-S-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCO-O-、-NU-、-N=CU-、-CO-NU-、-OCO-NU-またはO-NU-を表し、Uは水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基、芳香族炭化水素基(該芳香族炭化水素基の任意の炭素原子はヘテロ原子に置換されていてもよい)を有する炭素数2~30の有機基、または(E31-A31-B31-F31-P31を表し、該アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基および芳香族炭化水素基はそれぞれ、無置換であるかまたは1つ以上の置換基Xによって置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基は該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基によって置換されていてもよく、該アルキル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CO-S-、-S-CO-、-SO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-CH=CH-COO-、-CH=CH-OCO-、-COO-CH=CH-、-OCO-CH=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-または-C≡C-に置き換えられてもよく、該シクロアルキル基またはシクロアルケニル基中の1個の-CH-または隣接していない2個以上の-CH-は、それぞれ独立に-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-またはO-CO-O-に置き換えられてもよく、E31は前記B31と同様に定義され、A31は、炭素数3~16の2価の脂環式炭化水素基または炭素数6~20の2価の芳香族炭化水素基を表し、該脂環式炭化水素基および該芳香族炭化水素基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子、-R11、-OR12、シアノ基またはニトロ基で置換されていてもよく、R11は、水素原子、フッ素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、R12は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基に含まれる水素原子は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよく、B31、F31およびP31は、それぞれ、前記B31、F31およびP31と同じ意味を有し、qは0~4の整数を表し、E31および/またはA31が複数存在する場合は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、UとUとが結合して環を構成していてもよい〕
    から選ばれる基を表す。]
    A compound represented by formula (1) and a compound represented by formula (6) are reacted in the presence of a basic compound to obtain a reaction mixture composition containing a compound represented by formula (7). The area percentage value measured by liquid chromatography of the compound represented by formula (7) in the reaction mixture is the compound represented by formula (1), formula (6) contained in the reaction mixture composition. Production of a reaction mixture composition containing a compound represented by formula (7) that is more than 50% and less than 95% based on the sum of the area values of the compound represented by and the compound represented by formula (7) Method.
    A-Ar-A (1)
    HO-Ar-OH (6)
    A-Ar-OH (7)
    [A in formula (1) and formula (7) is the following formula (4):
    *-D 1 -(A 1 -E 1 )m-SP 1 -L 1 (4)
    It is expressed as
    In formula (4), * represents the bonding position with Ar in formula (1) or formula (7),
    m represents an integer of 1 or more,
    D 1 represents -C(=O)-O- or -OC(=O)-,
    E 1 is a single bond, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -C(=S)-, -CR 1 R 2 -, -CR 3 =CR 4 -, -NR 5 -, or , represents a divalent linking group consisting of a combination of two or more of these, R 1 to R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and m is 2 or more. If it is an integer, multiple E1s may be the same or different,
    A 1 is a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. represents a hydrogen group, and when m is an integer of 2 or more, the plurality of A1s may be the same or different,
    SP 1 is a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. or one or more of -CH 2 - constituting the alkylene group, the alkenylene group, and the alkynylene group is -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N(Q)-, or represents a divalent linking group substituted with -CO-, Q represents a substituent,
    L 1 represents a monovalent organic group,
    Ar in formula (1), formula (6) and formula (7) is a group represented by any of the following formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000003
    [In formulas (Ar-1) to (Ar-6),
    * represents a bond with D 1 or D 2 ;
    Q 1 represents -S-, -O- or -NR 6 -, R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent,
    Q2 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a substituent;
    W 1 and W 2 each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 6 -, and R 6 is a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 to 6 which may have a substituent. represents an alkyl group;
    Y 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, or an aromatic heterocyclic group,
    Y 2 represents a CN group or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom. -CH 2 - may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -O-CO- or -CO-O-;
    Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a monovalent carbon atom 6 to 20 aromatic hydrocarbon groups, halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and Z 1 and Z 2 are bonded to each other to form an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocycle. R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
    Z 4 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or alkoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, represents a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR 6 R 7 or -SR 6 , and R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
    Ax represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ay may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having at least one aromatic ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and Ax and Ay are a bond. may form a ring;
    Y 3 and Y 4 each independently represent the following formula (Y 3 -1):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000004
    [In formula (Y 3 -1),
    R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group may be substituted with one or more substituents X 3 , and the substituent X 3 is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, Bromine atom, iodine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, amino group, hydroxyl group, mercapto group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethyl A silyl group, a thioisocyano group, or one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s each independently represent -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, - OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -CH=CH-COO-, -CH=CH-OCO- , -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or -C≡C-, a linear or It represents a branched alkyl group, and any hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, or it may be a group represented by -B 31 -F 31 -P 31 (wherein , B 31 is -CR 8 R 9 -, -CH 2 -CH 2 -, -O-, -S-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -C (=S)-O-, -OC(=S)-, -OC(=S)-O-, -CO-NR 8 -, -NR 8 -CO-, -O-CH 2 - , -CH 2 -O-, -S-CH 2 -, -CH 2 -S- or a single bond, and R 8 and R 9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a C 1-4 carbon atom. represents an alkyl group; F 31 represents an alkanediyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkanediyl group may be substituted with -OR 10 or a halogen atom, and R 10 is a carbon Represents an alkyl group of numbers 1 to 4, the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and -CH 2 - contained in the alkanediyl group is -O- or -CO- may be substituted with; P 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group),
    U 1 represents an organic group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom, and the aromatic hydrocarbon group is , may be substituted by one or more of the above substituents X3 ;
    T 1 is -O-, -S-, -COO-, -OCO-, -OCO-O-, -NU 2 -, -N=CU 2 -, -CO-NU 2 -, -OCO-NU 2 - or O-NU 2 -, and U 2 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. (any carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a hetero atom), or (E 31 -A 31 ) q -B 31 -F 31 - P31 , and each of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, cycloalkenyl group and aromatic hydrocarbon group may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents X3 , and the alkyl group may be substituted by the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in the alkyl group are each independently substituted with -O -, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -SO 2 -, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, - NH-CO-, -CH=CH-COO-, -CH=CH-OCO-, -COO-CH=CH-, -OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-, -CF=CF- or - It may be replaced by C≡C-, and one -CH 2 - or two or more non-adjacent -CH 2 -s in the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group are each independently -O-, It may be replaced with -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- or O-CO-O-, E 31 is defined in the same manner as B 31 above, and A 31 is a divalent group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms. It represents an alicyclic hydrocarbon group or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and the hydrogen atoms contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group are halogen atoms, -R 11 , -OR 12 , which may be substituted with a cyano group or a nitro group, R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 12 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. represents a group, and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and B 31 , F 31 and P 31 have the same meanings as the above B 31 , F 31 and P 31 , respectively. However, q represents an integer from 0 to 4, and when multiple E 31 and/or A 31 exist, they may be the same or different, and U 1 and U 2 combine to form a ring. ]
    represents a group selected from ]
  13.  イオン化定数(pKa)が7以上である塩基性化合物の存在下で、式(1)で表される化合物と式(6)で表される化合物とを反応させる、請求項12に記載の製造方法。 The manufacturing method according to claim 12, wherein the compound represented by formula (1) and the compound represented by formula (6) are reacted in the presence of a basic compound having an ionization constant (pKa) of 7 or more. .
  14.  請求項12に記載の製造方法により得られる式(7)で表される化合物を含む反応混合組成物と、式(8):
     HOOC-(A-E)n-SP-L    (8)
    [式(8)中、A、E、n、SPおよびLは、それぞれ、式(5)中のA、E、n、SPおよびLと同じ意味を表す]
    で表される化合物とを混合し、式(7)で表される化合物と式(8)で表される化合物とを反応させて式(2)で表される化合物を生成することを含む、請求項1に記載の混合組成物の製造方法。
    A reaction mixture composition containing a compound represented by formula (7) obtained by the production method according to claim 12, and formula (8):
    HOOC-(A 2 -E 2 )n-SP 2 -L 2 (8)
    [In formula (8), A 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 each have the same meaning as A 2 , E 2 , n, SP 2 and L 2 in formula (5)]
    and mixing the compound represented by the formula (7) and the compound represented by the formula (8) to produce the compound represented by the formula (2), A method for producing the mixed composition according to claim 1.
PCT/JP2023/023117 2022-08-24 2023-06-22 Mixed composition, retardation film, circularly polarizing plate, production method for mixed composition WO2024042834A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022133352A JP2024030442A (en) 2022-08-24 2022-08-24 Mixed composition, retardation film, circularly polarizing plate, method for producing mixed composition
JP2022-133352 2022-08-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024042834A1 true WO2024042834A1 (en) 2024-02-29

Family

ID=90012865

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/023117 WO2024042834A1 (en) 2022-08-24 2023-06-22 Mixed composition, retardation film, circularly polarizing plate, production method for mixed composition

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2024030442A (en)
WO (1) WO2024042834A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2017197602A (en) * 2016-04-25 2017-11-02 住友化学株式会社 Liquid crystal composition and method for producing the same, and phase difference film composed of the liquid crystal composition
WO2018096938A1 (en) * 2016-11-22 2018-05-31 日本ゼオン株式会社 Polymerizable compound, polymerizable composition, polymer, optical film, optically anisotropic body, polarizing plate, flat-panel display device, organic electroluminescence display device, antireflection film, and compound
WO2019160025A1 (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-22 富士フイルム株式会社 Polymerizable liquid crystal composition, production method for polymerizable liquid crystal composition, optically anisotropic film, optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2017197602A (en) * 2016-04-25 2017-11-02 住友化学株式会社 Liquid crystal composition and method for producing the same, and phase difference film composed of the liquid crystal composition
WO2018096938A1 (en) * 2016-11-22 2018-05-31 日本ゼオン株式会社 Polymerizable compound, polymerizable composition, polymer, optical film, optically anisotropic body, polarizing plate, flat-panel display device, organic electroluminescence display device, antireflection film, and compound
WO2019160025A1 (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-22 富士フイルム株式会社 Polymerizable liquid crystal composition, production method for polymerizable liquid crystal composition, optically anisotropic film, optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2024030442A (en) 2024-03-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6701696B2 (en) Composition, optical film, composition, and method for producing optical film
JP7420502B2 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal mixed composition, retardation plate, elliptically polarizing plate, and organic EL display device
JP6498711B2 (en) Liquid crystal composition
CN110720064A (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal composition and retardation plate
TWI701320B (en) Liquid crystal composition
TWI821401B (en) Polarizing film, polarizing plate containing same and display device
JP2023143910A (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal composition, polarizing film and method for manufacturing the same, polarizing plate and display device
JP7173766B2 (en) compounds, liquid crystal compositions, optical films, polarizers and optical displays
JP7078467B2 (en) Compounds, liquid crystal compositions, optical films, polarizing plates and optical displays
WO2024042834A1 (en) Mixed composition, retardation film, circularly polarizing plate, production method for mixed composition
TWI786074B (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal compound, retardation film, polarizing plate and optical display including the retardation film
WO2023199630A1 (en) Polymerizable compound and mixed composition
JP7183312B2 (en) Liquid crystal composition, method for producing the same, and retardation film composed of the liquid crystal composition
WO2023223639A1 (en) Polymerizable compound, polymerizable composition, optical film, and display apparatus
WO2022168607A1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal mixture and polymerizable liquid crystal composition
KR20240072041A (en) Retardation film-forming composition, method for producing retardation film and retardation plate
JP2022065984A (en) Polymerizable compound and elliptically polarizing plate with cured product layer thereof
TW202132546A (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal composition, polarizing film, polarizing thin film and polarizing plate including a polymerizable liquid crystal compound having at least one polymerizable group, a dichroic dye, and a photopolymerization initiator
WO2019198697A1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal composition

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23856951

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1